information technology 0418/03 2 hours 45 … international examinations international general...

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONSInternational General Certificate of Secondary Education

INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY 0418/03

Paper 3: Practical TestMay/June 2003

2 hours 45 minutes

Additional Materials: Candidate Source Files

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Make sure that your name, centre number and candidate number are shown on each printout that you areasked to produce.

Carry out every instruction in each task.

Tasks are numbered on the left hand side of the page, so that you can see what to do, step by step. On theright hand side of the page for each task, you will find a box which you can tick (�) when you havecompleted the task; this checklist will help you to track your progress through the assignment.

Before each printout you should proof-read the document to make sure that you have followed allinstructions carefully.

At the end of the assignment put all your printouts into the Assessment Record Folder.

This document consists of 5 printed pages.

� CIE 2003 [Turn over

www.XtremePapers.com

2

0418/3/J/03 [Turn over

TASK A – COMMUNICATION

You work for an international company called Hothouse Design which has a contract with anorganisation called Rootrainer Trees.

�

1 Send a message to [email protected] which contains the subjectline STANDARD2003C and the text Please send the instructions

1.2.1

2 Read the reply to your message and follow the instructions. The URLwhich you will need is http://www.hothouse-design.co.uk

1.1.1

1.4.1

2.1.1

2.2.1

2.3.1

3 Prepare to send a message to [email protected] with the subjectset to ICTCOREX and attach the file which you downloaded from theHothouse website to your e-mail. Add your name to the end of themessage.

1.2.1

1.3.1

4 Print a copy of this e-mail, showing clearly that the attachment is present.Then send the e-mail.

11.1.1

3


TASK B – DOCUMENT PRODUCTION

You are now going to edit a document about Rootrainer Trees and one of its subsidiaries, Kuroki Koi.

�

5 Using a suitable software package, load the file KUROKI.TXT 3.1.11.4.1

6 Set the page size to A4. 4.1.1

7 Set the page orientation to landscape. 4.1.2

8 At the top of each page put your name on the left and today’s date on theright. Put page numbering at the bottom left-hand side of each page.

4.1.3

9 Set the top, bottom, left and right margins to 3.5 centimetres. 4.1.4

10 Set the text to 1.5 line spacing. 4.1.5

11 Make the text left aligned. 4.1.6

12 Set the text size to 10 point. 5.5.1

13 Insert the heading Kuroki Koi at the top of the document. 3.2.1

14 Centre the heading and select a different font from the rest of the text.Change the size of the heading to 14 point and make it bold and underlined.

4.1.65.5.1

15 Add bullet points to the list:LondonParisMilanWashingtonSeattle

5.2.1

16 Make sure that the bulleted list is indented by at least 4 centimetres. 5.1.1

17 Insert a page break before the paragraph which starts Another possibledevelopment of this idea would be to introduce specialist koi ...

5.4.1

18 Spell-check and proof-read the document.

19 Save the document using a new filename and print a draft copy. 11.1.1

4


TASK C – DATA MANIPULATION

You are now going to manipulate and extract some data.

��

20 Using a suitable database package, import the file KUROKI.CSV 6.1.1

21 Insert the data for the following three records: 6.2.1

Species Main Other Metallic Rating

Benigoi Red None N 45

Benigoi Red None Y 55

Benigoi Orange None N 56

Check your data entry for errors.

22 Save the data. 11.1.1

23 Produce a report which:

� shows all the fish where Species is Benigoi 8.2.1

� shows all the fields

� has a page orientation of portrait 9.1.3

� includes the heading Benigoi Koi at the top of the page 9.1.2

� has your name on the right in the footer. 9.1.3

24 Save and print this report. 11.1.2

25 Produce a new report from all the data which:

� shows the fish where the Main colour is Yellow or the Other colour isYellow

8.2.1

� shows only the fields Species, Main, Other, Rating 9.1.1

� is sorted into ascending order of Species (with Ki Bekko at the top) 8.1.1

� has the average Rating calculated at the bottom of the Rating column 7.1.1

� includes the heading Koi with Yellow at the top of the page 9.1.2

� has your name on the left in the footer. 9.1.3


27 Select from all the data all the fish:

� where Rating is greater than or equal to 60 8.2.1

� sorted into descending order of Rating (with 92 at the top) 8.1.1

� showing only the fields Species, Rating 9.1.1

28 Save this data in a form which can be imported into a text document. 11.1.3

5

0418/3/J/03

TASK D – INTEGRATION

You are now going to make some changes to the document which you saved in Task B.

��

29 Open the document you saved in Task B. 10.1.1

30 Remove the page break inserted in Task B stage 17. 5.4.1

31 Set the page orientation to portrait. 4.1.2

32 Move the page numbering to the bottom right-hand side of each page. 4.1.3

33 Set the top, bottom, left and right margins to 2 centimetres. 4.1.4

34 Set the text to single line spacing. 4.1.5

35 Make all the text (except for the heading) fully justified. 4.1.6

36 Set the text size (except for the heading) to 12 point. 5.5.1

37 Create this table after the sentence Possible locations considered so far are: 5.3.13.2.1

La Roda Spain Warm

Whitstable England Close to market

Emmen Netherlands Natural lakes

Toulouse France Warm, good transport

Crawley England Close to market

38 Import a graphic image of a fish (from clip art, scanner, digital camera orelsewhere), and place this in the top right corner of page 1, below theheading Kuroki Koi.

10.1.1

39 Re-size the image so that it fills about a quarter of the page, as shownbelow. Make sure that the text wraps around the image.

3.3.2

40 You now need to import the data which you saved at the end of Task C.Insert this data as a table after the paragraph which ends ... garden centresidentifying the specific koi they would put into a pond if they had one.

Make sure there is one blank line above and below the table.

10.1.1

41 Place a page break, if necessary, to ensure there are no widows, orphans,tables or bulleted lists which overlap two pages.

5.4.1


43 Save the document using a new filename and print a final copy. 11.1.1



Paper 3: Practical TestOctober/November 2003

2 hours 45 minutes











2

0418/3/N/03 [Turn over

TASK A – COMMUNICATION

You work for an international company called Hothouse Design which has a contract with anorganisation called Ogawa Bonsai.

�

1 Send a message to [email protected] which contains the subjectline STANDARD2003B and the text Please send the instructions

1.2.1

2 Read the reply to your message and follow the instructions. The URLwhich you will need is http://www.hothouse-design.co.uk

1.1.1

1.4.1

2.1.1

2.2.1

2.3.1

3 Prepare to send a message to [email protected] with the subjectset to ICTCOREX and attach the file which you downloaded from theHothouse website to your e-mail. Add your name to the end of themessage.

1.2.1

1.3.1

4 Print a copy of this e-mail, showing clearly that the attachment is present.Then send the e-mail.

11.1.1

3


TASK B – DOCUMENT PRODUCTION

You are now going to edit a document about Ogawa Bonsai, a subsidiary of Rootrainer Trees.

�

5 Using a suitable software package, load the file OGAWA.TXT 3.1.11.4.1

6 Set the page size to A4. 4.1.1

7 Set the page orientation to landscape. 4.1.2

8 At the top of each page put your name on the left and today’s date on theright. Put page numbering in the centre at the bottom of each page.

4.1.3

9 Set the top, bottom, left and right margins to 3.5 centimetres. 4.1.4

10 Set the text to double line spacing. 4.1.5

11 Make the text left aligned. 4.1.6

12 Set the text size to 10 point. 5.5.1

13 Insert the heading Ogawa Bonsai at the top of the document. 3.2.1

14 Centre the heading and select a different font from the rest of the text.Change the size of the heading to 16 point and make it bold and italic.

4.1.65.5.1

15 Add bullet points to the list:propagation techniquesroot pruningwiringbonsai seasons

5.2.1

16 Make sure that the bulleted list is indented by at least 2 centimetres. 5.1.1

17 Insert a page break before the paragraph which starts There would be aneed for several of Takeo's multilingual Japanese ...

5.4.1


19 Save the document using a new filename and print a draft copy. 11.1.1

4


TASK C – DATA MANIPULATION

You are now going to manipulate and extract some data.

��

20 Using a suitable database package, import the file OGAWA.CSV 6.1.1

21 Insert the data for the following three records: 6.2.1

Species Variety Europe America Years

Acer Palmatum Ukon 82 46 10

Betula Pendulata 26 30 6

Betula Nana 38 41 9


22 Save the data. 11.1.1


� shows only the trees where the Species is Acer OR Betula 8.2.1

� shows all the fields

� sorts the data into descending order of Years (with 25 at the top) 8.1.1

� has a page orientation of portrait 9.1.3

� includes the heading Acer or Betula at the top of the page 9.1.2

� has your name on the right in the footer. 9.1.3



� shows only the trees where the Species is Pinus 8.2.1

� shows only the fields Species, Variety, America 9.1.1

� is sorted into ascending order of Variety (with Parviflora at the top) 8.1.1

� has the average value of America at the bottom of the America column 7.1.1

� includes the heading Pinus in America at the top of the page 9.1.2

� has your name on the left in the footer. 9.1.3


27 Select from all the data all the trees:

� where Europe is greater than 65 8.2.1

� with Years less than 10 8.2.1

� showing only the fields Species, Variety, Europe, Years 9.1.1

28 Save this data in a form which can be imported into a text document. 11.1.3

5

0418/3/N/03

TASK D – INTEGRATION

You are now going to make some changes to the document which you saved in Task B.

��

29 Open the document you saved in Task B. 10.1.1

30 Remove the page break inserted in Task B stage 17. 5.4.1

31 Set the page orientation to portrait. 4.1.2

32 Move the page numbering to the bottom left-hand side of each page. 4.1.3

33 Set the top, bottom, left and right margins to 2 centimetres. 4.1.4

34 Set the text to single line spacing. 4.1.5

35 Make all the text (except for the heading) fully justified. 4.1.6

36 Set the text size (except for the heading) to 12 point. 5.5.1

37 Create this table after the sentence The summary of this research is: 5.3.13.2.1

Species Deciduous Coniferous Market

Larix Yes Europe

Acer Yes Europe

Ulmus Yes Both

Picea Yes America

Pinus Yes America

Juniperus Yes America

38 Import a graphic image of a tree (from clip art, scanner, digital camera orelsewhere), and place this in the top right corner of page 1.

10.1.1

39 Change the image so that:

� it is re-sized to fill a quarter of the page

� the text wraps around the image

It should look like this:

3.3.2

40 You now need to import the data which you saved at the end of Task C.Insert this data as a table after the paragraph which ends The most popular

trees from the European market research are:


10.1.1

41 Place a page break, if necessary, to ensure there are no widows, orphans,tables or bulleted lists which overlap two pages.

5.4.1


43 Save the document using a new filename and print a final copy. 11.1.1



Paper 4: Practical TestMay/June 2003

2 hours 45 minutes











2


DATA ANALYSIS

You work for an international car hire company called Argon Hire. You have been asked by the salesdepartment to calculate the hire charges for vehicles which are to be advertised on the internet.

All currency values should be in dollars with the $ sign visible.

�

1 Create a data model which looks like this: 12.1.1

Insurance Table

Category Ins

A 0.1

B 0.15

C 0.2

D 0.25

E 0.3

F 0.35

Category Car Type Doors Rate Ins Rate Insurance Total Deposit

The cells in these columns will represent:

Category Car types are category A - FCar Type The type of each carDoors The number of doors on the carRate The daily rate, based on the car typeIns Rate Looks up the insurance rate using the categoryInsurance Calculation of the insuranceTotal Calculation of the total cost of car hireDeposit Does the car require a security deposit?

3


�

2 In the Insurance table name the range of cells which hold the data forCategory and Ins. Give this range the name ins

12.1.4

3 In the main table in the cell under Ins Rate, enter a formula using Lookup.This formula looks up the Ins in the Insurance Table using the Category.

12.1.4

4 In the main table in the cell under Insurance, enter a formula to multiply theRate by Ins Rate.

12.1.3

5 In the cell under Total, enter a formula which adds the Rate to the Insurance 12.1.3

6 In the Deposit column enter a formula to show whether a deposit is required.

If the Rate is greater than 60, display the word “Yes”If the Rate is not greater than 60, display the word “No”

12.1.4

7 Format the cells in the Ins Rate column to a percentage format. 14.1.1

8 Format the cells in the Rate, Insurance and Total columns to display the $sign (dollar) with 2 decimal places.

14.1.1

9 Copy down all formulae entered in stages 3 - 6 so that at least 8 rows of datacan be entered.

12.1.1

10 Set your page orientation to landscape. 14.3.1

11 Save the data model and print a copy of the sheet showing the formulaeused. Make sure that the contents of all cells are visible and that the printoutfits on a single printed page.

14.2.115.1.1

12 Enter the following data into the model to test that it works correctly: 12.1.212.2.1

Category Car Type Doors Rate Ins Rate Insurance Total Deposit

A Economy 2 38

B Compact 2 44

B Compact 4 48

C Intermediate 2 58

C Intermediate 4 60

DJeepwrangler

278

E Premium 4 94

F Luxury 4 95

4


�

13 Save this data and print a copy showing the values. Make sure that thecontents of all cells are visible and that the printout fits on a single printedpage.

14.2.115.1.1

14 Produce a printout showing only the rows where the Total is greater than 60but less than 100 and Doors are 2

13.1.115.1.1

15 Produce a printout showing only the rows where the Total is greater than 50and the Category is B or C

13.1.115.1.1

5


WEBSITE AUTHORING

You are going to prepare web pages for a car hire company called Argon Hire. These pages will giveinformation about the company and its products.

��

1 Download the following files fromhttp://www.hothouse-design.co.uk/2003webc to your own work area:

AHINTRO.HTMAHMENU.TXTARGHIRE.HTMCARS2003.JPGHIRE2003.JPGHOMEICON.JPG

16.1.116.2.1

2 Using a suitable software package, prepare the following styles for usewithin all pages on this website:

� H1 – Dark green, sans-serif font (e.g. Arial), largest (e.g. 40 point),bold, centred

� H2 – Bright blue, sans-serif (e.g. Arial), italic, smaller (e.g. 16 point),left aligned

� H3 – Bright green, serif (e.g. Times New Roman), smallest (e.g. 12point), left aligned.

Save the stylesheet and attach it to each web page as you create it.

17.1.117.1.217.1.317.1.4

3 Using a suitable software package, create a new homepageAHHOME.HTM This page will have a heading at the top, menu optionson the left and a text/graphics area on the right. It should look like this:

18.1.1

4 Enter the heading Argon Hire as style H1. 17.1.4

5 Place the contents of AHMENU.TXT down the left side of the page tocreate the menu options in style H2.

18.1.217.1.4

6 Create a hyperlink for the item Car Types to point to the fileAHINTRO.HTM which should open in a new window called EXTERNAL

Note that the web page which you have linked to is not yet complete.

18.2.118.2.2

7 In the text/graphics area on the right, create a table which has 5 rows and2 columns.

19.1.1

6


�

8 Merge the top two cells of the table.Merge the two cells in row 3.

19.1.3

9 Set a 6 point border size for the table. 19.1.2

10 Use the contents of the file AHINTRO.HTM :

� Place the heading: Our Services in the top cell and format this asstyle H1

� Place the text which starts Car Hire for … in the left cell in row 2 andformat this as style H2

� Place the text which starts We have a wide … in the cell in row 3and format this as style H3

� Place the text Quality Assurance into the left cell in row 4 and formatthis as style H2

� Place the text Weekly Hire Charges into the right cell in row 4 andformat this as style H2

� Place the text which starts We ensure all … into the left cell in row 5and format this as style H3

� Place the text which starts All vehicles come … into the right cell inrow 5 and format this as style H3.

17.1.418.1.1

11 Import the image CARS2003.JPG and place it in the right cell in row 2.Set the width to 150 pixels and maintain the aspect ratio. Make sure thatthe whole image is visible.

20.1.120.1.220.2.1

12 Make sure that you have attached the stylesheet to this page and save itas AHHOME.HTM

Print this page as it is viewed in your browser. Print a copy of the HTMLsource.

21.1.1

13 Open the file HOMEICON.JPG in a suitable application. Change its sizeto 35 pixels wide and maintain the aspect ratio. Ensure that the colourdepth is 256 colours (8 bit colour) and save the file as HOMEICON.GIF

20.2.2

14 Open the file ARGHIRE.HTMImport the image HIRE2003.JPG to the right of the page. Reduce theimage HIRE2003.JPG to 225 pixels wide and maintain the aspect ratio.Place this image to the right of the text in the table. Replace the text clickhere (at the bottom of the page) with the image HOMEICON.GIF Makethis a link (in the same window) to the file AHHOME.HTM

20.1.120.1.220.2.120.2.218.2.1

15 Make sure that you have attached the stylesheet to this page and save itas ARGHIRE.HTM Apply the styles H1, H2 and H3 to text on the page.


17.1.421.1.1

7


PRESENTATION AUTHORING

You work for an international car hire company called Argon Hire. You are going to set up apresentation for use in the company’s reception area. You will produce a presentation to be viewedon a computer monitor and you will also produce handouts for customers.

�

1 Set up a new presentation consisting of 3 slides. The slide master must have apale green background and your name and today’s date in small black text in thebottom left corner. Place the auto slide number at the bottom right of each slide.Place clipart on the master slide as a logo at the top right of the each slide.

22.1.122.3.1

Set the following styles of text throughout the entire presentation:2

Heading:

Subheading:

Bulleted list:

Dark green, left aligned, large font (between 50 and 72 point)

Bright blue, left aligned, medium font (between 36 and 44point)

Bright blue, left aligned, small font (between 18 and 32 point).Use a bullet of your choice.

22.1.1

On the first slide:

3 Enter the heading Argon Hire 22.2.1

4 Enter the subheading Experts in the area of car hire for the past 6 yearsbelow the heading.

22.2.1

8


On the second slide:

�

5 Enter the heading Our weekly hire charges in the same style as the first slide. 22.2.1

6 Produce a chart on the left side of the slide from the following data: 22.3.2

Model Cost

Mini 41.80

Economy 42.90

Compact 50.60

Intermediate 62.40

Jeep Wrangler 97.50

Minivan 111.80

Fullsize 120.15

Premium 131.60

Luxury 137.75

7 Produce a list on the right side of the slide, as shown below:

� Many cars to choose from

� All with full insurance

� Daily rates quoted

� Weekly rates available

22.2.1

8 Draw a green line between the chart and the list on this slide. This shouldseparate the chart from the bullet list.

22.3.3

9 The bullets should be set to appear one at a time. 23.2.1

9

0418/4/J/03

On the third slide:

�

10 Enter the heading Various pick-up points in the same style as the first slide. 22.2.1

11 Enter the following bulleted list on the left side of the slide:

� At the airport

� At your hotel

� At your villa

� At our main office

22.2.1

12 Insert the graphic CARSALE.JPG

Resize and position it so that it almost fills the right half of the slide underneaththe heading.

22.3.1

For the whole presentation:

13 Use the same transitional effect between slides. 23.1.1

14 Use one animation effect on the title of all slides. 23.2.1

15 Save the presentation using a new filename. Print the presentation with threeslides to a page.

24.1.1

(Please note – your tutor will need to assess the transitions and animations before submitting yourwork.)



Paper 4: Practical TestOctober/November 2003

2 hours 45 minutes











2


DATA ANALYSIS

You work for an international company called Gem Export, which sells jewels and precious stones.

You have been asked by the marketing department to calculate the cost of the gems which are goingto be advertised on the internet.

All currency values should be in dollars with the $ sign visible.

�

1 Create a data model which looks like this: 12.1.1

Cutting options

Gem cut cabochons faceted

Cutting cost 5 10

Name PreciousGemcut Carat

CaratValue

CutCost Insurance

TotalValue


Name Name of the gemsPrecious The type of each gemGem cut The cut of the gem faceCarat The weight of each gemCarat Value The cost per caratCut Cost The cost of cutting each gemInsurance Calculation of the insuranceTotal Value Calculation of the total cost of the gem

2 In the Cutting options table name the range of cells which hold the data forGem cut and Cutting cost. Give this range the name cut

12.1.4

3


�

3 In the main table in the cell under Cut Cost, enter a formula using Lookup.This formula looks up the Cutting Cost in the Cutting options table using theGem cut and divides this value by the Carat.

12.1.312.1.4

4 In the cell under Insurance enter a formula to calculate the insurance cost.

If the Precious data is p, calculate Carat x 2.50If the Precious data is not p, calculate Carat x 1.50

12.1.3

5 In the cell under Total Value, enter a formula which multiplies the Carat by theCarat Value and adds the Cut Cost and Insurance.

12.1.3

6 Format the cells in the Carat Value, Cut Cost, Insurance and Total Valuecolumns to display the $ sign with 2 decimal places.

14.1.1

7 Copy down all formulae entered in stages 3 – 5 so that at least 12 rows ofdata can be entered.

12.1.1

8 Set your page orientation to landscape. 14.3.1

9 Save the data model and print a copy of the sheet showing the formulaeused. Make sure that the contents of all cells are visible and that the printoutfits on a single printed page.

14.2.115.1.1

10 Enter the following data into the model to test that it works correctly. 12.1.212.2.1

Name PreciousGemcut Carat

CaratValue

CutCost Insurance

TotalValue

Amethyst sp faceted 17.9 5.00

Amethyst sp cabochons 25.87 6.00

Aquamarine sp faceted 2.23 31.50

Citrine sp faceted 18.88 12.00

Diamond p faceted 0.29 862.00

Emerald p cabochons 0.42 357.00

Garnet sp cabochons 6.34 26.00

Peridot sp faceted 3.52 30.00

Ruby p faceted 0.7 286.00

Sapphire p faceted 1.51 100.00

Tanzanite sp cabochons 1.12 151.00

Topaz sp faceted 15.8 11.00

4


�

11 Save this data and print a copy showing the values. Make sure that thecontents of all cells are visible and that the printout fits on a single printedpage.

14.2.115.1.1

12 Produce a printout showing only the rows where the Total Value is greaterthan 150 and Precious is sp

13.1.115.1.1

13 Produce a printout showing only the rows where the Gem cut equals facetedand Insurance is less than 5

13.1.115.1.1

5


WEBSITE AUTHORING

You are going to prepare some web pages for Gem Export, an international company which sellsjewels and precious stones. These pages will give information about the company and its products.

��

1 Download the following files fromhttp://www.hothouse-design.co.uk/2003webb to your own work area:

GEINTRO.HTMGEMENU.TXTGEMS.HTMGEMS2003.JPGHOMEICON.JPGPRES2003.JPG

16.1.116.2.1

2 Using a suitable software package, prepare the following styles for usewithin all pages on this website:

� H1 – Dark blue, serif font (e.g. Times New Roman), largest (e.g. 36point), bold, centred

� H2 – Bright blue, sans-serif (e.g. Arial), italic, smaller (e.g. 14 point),left aligned

� H3 – Bright blue, sans-serif (e.g. Arial), smallest (e.g. 12 point), fullyjustified


17.1.117.1.217.1.317.1.4

3 Using a suitable software package, create a new homepageGEHOME.HTM This page will have a heading at the top, menu optionson the left and a text/graphics area on the right. It should look like this:

18.1.1

4 Enter the heading Gem Export as style H1. 17.1.4

5 Place the contents of GEMENU.TXT down the left side of the page tocreate the menu options in style H2.

18.1.217.1.4

6 Create a hyperlink for the item Stones to point to the file GEMS.HTMwhich should open in a new window called EXTERNAL


18.2.118.2.2

7 In the text/graphics area on the right, create a table which has 5 rows and2 columns.

19.1.1

6


�

8 Merge the top two cells of the table.Merge the two cells in row 3.

19.1.3

9 Set a 4 point border size for the table. 19.1.2

10 Use the contents of the file GEINTRO.HTM :

� Place the heading Our Products in the top cell and format this asstyle H1

� Place the text which starts Precious and Semi … in the left cell inrow 2 and format this as style H2

� Place the text which starts We have a wide … in the cell in row 3and format this as style H3

� Place the text Quality Assurance into the left cell in row 4 and formatthis as style H2

� Place the text Weight and Cost into the right cell in row 4 and formatthis as style H2

� Place the text which starts We ensure all … in the left cell in row 5and format this as style H3

� Place the text which starts Our products vary … in the right cell inrow 5 and format this as style H3.

17.1.418.1.1

11 Import the image GEMS2003.JPG and place it in the right cell in row 2.Set the width to 100 pixels and the height to 100 pixels. Make sure thatthe whole image is visible.

20.1.120.1.220.2.1

12 Make sure that you have attached the stylesheet to this page and save itas GEHOME.HTM


21.1.1

13 Open the file HOMEICON.JPG in a suitable application. Change its sizeto 35 pixels wide and maintain the aspect ratio. Ensure that the colourdepth is 256 colours (8 bit colour) and save the file as HOMEICON.GIF

20.2.2

14 Open the file GEMS.HTMImport the image PRES2003.JPG to the right of the page. Enlarge theimage PRES2003.JPG to 150 pixels wide and maintain the aspect ratio.Place this image to the right of the text in the table. Replace the text clickhere (at the bottom of the page) with the image HOMEICON.GIF Makethis a link (in the same window) to the file GEHOME.HTM

20.1.120.1.220.2.120.2.218.2.1

15 Make sure that you have attached the stylesheet to this page and save itas GEMS.HTM Apply the styles H1, H2 and H3 to any text on the page.


17.1.421.1.1

7



You work for an international company called Gem Export. You are going to set up a presentation foruse at exhibitions. Presenter notes need to be developed with the slides.

�

1 Set up a new presentation consisting of 3 slides. The slide master must have apale blue background and your name and today’s date in small black text in thetop left corner. Place the auto slide number at the bottom right of each slide.

22.1.1

Set the following styles of text throughout the entire presentation:2

Heading:

Subheading:

Bulleted list:

Dark blue, right aligned, large font (between 52 and 68 point)

Bright blue, left aligned, medium font (between 32 and 48 point)

Bright blue, left aligned, small font (between 20 and 28 point).Use a bullet of your choice.

22.1.1

On the first slide:

3 Enter the heading Gem Export 22.2.1

4 Enter the subheading Exporters of precious and semi-precious gems belowthe heading.

22.2.1

5 Add the following presenter notes to this slide:

Introduce yourself and your role within the company.

22.2.1

8



�

6 Enter the heading Cost of precious gems in the same style as the first slide. 22.2.1

7 Produce a chart on the left side of the slide from the following data: 22.3.2

Type Cost

Diamond 285

Emerald 163

Ruby 216

Sapphire 161

8 Produce a list on the right side of the slide, as shown below:

� Diamond

� Emerald

� Ruby

� Sapphire

22.2.1

9 Draw a line between the chart and the list on this slide. This should separate thechart from the bullet list.

22.3.3



The chart shows the individual gem cost of our current stock.

22.2.1

9

0418/4/N/03

On the third slide:

�

12 Enter the heading Semi-precious gems in the same style as the first slide. 22.2.1


� Amethyst

� Aquamarine

� Citrine

� Garnet

� Peridot

� Tanzanite

� Topaz

22.2.1

14 Insert the graphic GEMS2003.JPG

Resize and position it so that it almost fills the right half of the slide underneaththe heading.

22.3.1


We have a wide selection of semi-precious stones in stock. Why not visitour website at http://www.gemexp.com

22.2.1


16 Use the same transitional effect between slides. 23.1.1

17 Use one animation effect on the title of all slides. 23.2.1

18 Save and print the presentation showing all presenter notes. 24.1.1

(Please note – your tutor will need to assess the transitions and animations before submitting yourwork.)

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS

International General Certificate of Secondary Education

INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY

Paper 3: Practical Test

May/June 2004

2 hours 45 minutes


READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Make sure that your name, centre number and candidate number are shown on each printout that you are

asked to produce. Carry out every instruction in each task. Tasks are numbered on the left hand side of the page, so that you can see what to do, step by step. On the

right hand side of the page for each task, you will find a box which you can tick (�) when you have completed the task; this checklist will help you to track your progress through the assignment.

Before each printout you should proof-read the document to make sure that you have followed all

instructions carefully. At the end of the assignment put all your printouts into the Assessment Record Folder.


IB04 06_0418_03/RP

© UCLES 2004

[Turn over


2

© UCLES 2004 0418/3/J/04 [Turn over

You work for an international company called Hothouse Design. You are going to help plan and design a new manufacturing plant for a large company. TASK A - COMMUNICATION � 1 Send a message to [email protected] which contains the subject line

STANDARD2004A and the text Please send the instructions.

1.2.1

2 Read the reply to your message and follow the instructions. The URL which you will need is http://www.hothouse-design.co.uk

1.1.1 1.4.1 2.1.1 2.2.1 2.3.1

3 Prepare to send a message to [email protected] with the subject set to ICTCOREX and attach the file which you downloaded from the Hothouse website to your e-mail. The message should say Here is the requested file. Add your name to the end of the message.

1.2.1 1.3.1

4 Print a copy of this e-mail, showing clearly that the attachment is present. Send the e-mail.

11.1.1

3


TASK B – DOCUMENT PRODUCTION You are now going to edit a document about the proposed manufacturing plant. �

5 Using a suitable software package, load the file SCA4MANU.TXT

3.1.1

6 Set the page size to A4.

4.1.1

7 Set the page orientation to landscape.

4.1.2

8 Place your name left aligned and today’s date right aligned in the header. Place the page number left aligned in the footer. Make sure that headers and footers are displayed on each page.

4.1.3

9 Set the top, bottom, left and right margins to 4 centimetres.

4.1.4

10 Set the text to single line spacing.

4.1.5

11 Make the text fully justified.

4.1.6

12 Set the text size to 12 point.

5.5.1

13 Insert the heading Proposed Manufacturing Plant at the top of the document.

3.2.1

14 Centre the heading and select a different font from the rest of the text. Change the size of the heading to 18 point and make it underlined.

4.1.6 5.5.1

15 Add bullet points to the list:

availability of water good transport links remote location 60000-hectare site

5.2.1

16 Make sure that the bulleted list is indented by at least 3 centimetres.

5.1.1

17 Insert a page break before the paragraph which starts: The location must be remote from any centres of population…

5.4.1


19 Save the document using a new filename and print a draft copy.

11.1.1

4


TASK C – DATA MANIPULATION You are now going to manipulate and extract some data. �

20 Using a suitable database package, import the file SCA4POP.CSV

6.1.1

21 Insert the data for the following three records:

6.2.1

Country Region Population Density Energy Imports Exports

Thailand Asia 60.8 119 1.07 1236 946

Trinidad and Tobago West Indies 1.3 253 7.53 1329 1904

Uruguay America 3.3 19 0.78 899 660


22 Save the data.

11.1.1


• shows only the countries where the Population is greater than 10

• shows all the fields

• sorts the data into ascending alphabetical order of Country (with Australia at the top)

• has a page orientation of portrait

• includes the heading High population countries at the top of the page

• has your name on the right in the footer.

8.2.1

9.1.1

8.1.1

9.1.3 9.1.2

9.1.3

24 Save and print this report.

11.1.2


• shows only the countries where the Density is greater than 100 and the Region is Asia

• shows only the fields Country, Region, Density, Energy

• is sorted into descending order of Density (with 5246 at the top)

• has the average Energy value calculated at the bottom of the Energy column

• includes the heading Asia – densely populated at the top of the page

• has your name on the left in the footer.

8.2.1

9.1.1

8.1.1

7.1.1 9.1.2

9.1.3


11.1.2

27 Select from all the data, only the countries:

• where Region is America or West Indies

• with a Population of less than 3.5

• showing only the fields Country, Region, Population, Density

8.2.1

8.2.1

9.1.1

28 Save this data in a form which can be imported into a text document.

11.1.3

5


TASK D - INTEGRATION You are now going to make some changes to the document which you saved in Task B. �

29 Open the document you saved in Task B.

3.1.1

30 Remove the page break inserted in Task B step 17.

5.4.1

31 Set the page orientation to portrait.

4.1.2

32 Move the page numbering so that it is right aligned in the footer of each page.

4.1.3


4.1.4

34 Set the text to 1.5 line spacing.

4.1.5

35 Make all the text (except for the heading) left aligned.

4.1.6

36 Set the text size (except for the heading) to 10 point.

5.5.1

37 Create a table with 5 rows and 3 columns after the sentence: These are the estimated employment requirements: Enter the following data into this table:

5.3.1 3.2.1

Phase Employed Number

Construction Local 750

Construction External 12

Operation Local 30

Operation External 32

38 Import a graphic image showing construction or building (from clip art, scanner, digital camera or elsewhere), and place this in the top left corner of page 1.

10.1.1


• it is re-sized to fill a quarter of the page

• the text wraps around the image

• it appears below the title


3.3.2

6

Every reasonable effort has been made to trace all copyright holders where the publishers (i.e. UCLES) are aware that third-party material has been

reproduced. The publishers would be pleased to hear from anyone whose rights they have unwittingly infringed.

University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2004 0418/3/J/04

� 40 You now need to import the data which you saved at the end of Task C.

Insert this data as a table after the paragraph which ends: Here are the details of all the short listed countries in that region with a population of under 3.5 million people: Make sure there is one blank line above and below the table.

10.1.1

41 Spell-check and proof-read the document. Place page breaks, if necessary, to ensure that:

• tables do not overlap two pages

• bulleted lists do not overlap two pages

• there are no widows

• there are no orphans

• there are no blank pages

5.4.1

42 Save the document using a new filename and print a final copy.

11.1.1





October/November 2004

2 hours 45 minutes








IB04 11_0418_03/RP

© UCLES 2004

[Turn over


2

© UCLES 2004 0418/03/N/04 [Turn over


STANDARD2004B and the text Please send the instructions.

1.2.1


1.1.1 1.4.1 2.1.1 2.2.1 2.3.1


1.2.1 1.3.1


11.1.1

3

© UCLES 2004 0418/03/N/04 [Turn over


5 Using a suitable software package, load the file SCB4MANU.TXT

3.1.1


4.1.1


4.1.2


4.1.3


4.1.4


4.1.5

11 Make the text left aligned.

4.1.6


5.5.1

13 Insert the heading Quattichem – Phase 2 at the top of the document.

3.2.1


4.1.6 5.5.1


economic factors political stability availability of water good transport links

5.2.1


5.1.1

17 Insert a page break before the paragraph which starts: The dry raw materials for the two processes…

5.4.1



11.1.1

4

© UCLES 2004 0418/03/N/04 [Turn over


20 Using a suitable database package, import the file SCB4AFR.CSV

6.1.1

Insert the data for the following three records:

4.4.1


Botswana Africa 1.5 3 0.01 1153 1302

Gabon Africa 1.2 5 0.87 667 2055

Swaziland Africa 1 55 0.01 1090 855

6.2.1

21


22 Save the data.

11.1.1


• shows only the countries where the Population is less than 2


• sorts the data into ascending alphabetical order of Country (with Botswana at the top)


• includes the heading Low population at the top of the page


8.2.1

9.1.1

8.1.1

9.1.3

9.1.2

9.1.3


11.1.2


• shows only the countries where the Density is less than 20 and the Energy use is greater than 0.5

• shows only the fields Country, Region, Density, Energy


• has the maximum Energy value calculated at the bottom of the Energy column

• includes the heading Low density and high energy at the top of the page


8.2.1

9.1.1

8.1.1

7.1.1

9.1.2

9.1.3


11.1.2


• where Imports are greater than 100 and less than 500

• with the Exports less than 50

• showing only the fields Country, Density, Imports and Exports

8.2.1

8.2.1

9.1.1


11.1.3

5

© UCLES 2004 0418/03/N/04 [Turn over



3.1.1


5.4.1


4.1.2


4.1.3


4.1.4


4.1.5

35 Make all the text (except for the heading) fully justified.

4.1.6


5.5.1

37 Create a table with 5 rows and 3 columns after the sentence which ends…potential country which summarises key employment factors like this: Enter the following data into this table:

5.3.1 3.2.1

Activity Region Percentage

Industry Cottage Industry 7%

Agriculture Coffee, Maize 56%

Unemployed 34%

Education or Other 3%

38 Import a graphic image showing construction or building (from clip art, scanner, digital camera or elsewhere), and place this in the top right corner of page 1.

10.1.1






3.3.2

6

Every reasonable effort has been made to trace all copyright holders where the publishers (i.e. UCLES) are aware that third-party material has been reproduced. The publishers would be pleased to hear from anyone whose rights they have unwittingly infringed. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2004 0418/03/N/04


Insert this data as a table after the paragraph which ends: The starting point for this team will be the following countries: Make sure there is one blank line above and below the table.

10.1.1







5.4.1


11.1.1





May/June 2004

2 hours 45 minutes








IB04 06_0418_04/RP

© UCLES 2004

[Turn over


2


DATA ANALYSIS You work for a stationery company called Pens4U. Your manager has asked you to calculate the value of current orders. � 1 Create a data model which looks like this:

12.1.1

Date Company Description Order

Value Discount Value

Total Information Table

Stokers Discount 0.05 0.08

Caprossi Number of orders

Aztec Supplies

Kwik Mart

Caprossi

Russell Card

Aztec Supplies

Kwik Mart

Russell Card

Cooper Briggs

Kwik Mart

Stokers


Date The date of the order Company The name of the customer Description The description of the stationery item ordered Order Value The value of each order before discount Discount Value The discount value given to each customer based on

the order value Total Total amount of order after the discount is subtracted

2 In the Information Table name the cell containing the data 0.05 as five

Name the cell containing the data 0.08 as eight

These named cells will be used to calculate the Discount Value.

12.1.3

3 In the main table in the cell under Discount Value, enter a formula to calculate the discount of the first order:

If the Order Value is greater than 125, then multiply the Order Value by the named cell eight; if not, then multiply the Order Value by the named cell five

12.1.4

4 In the main table in the cell under Total enter a formula which subtracts the Discount Value from the Order Value

12.1.3

5 In the Information Table format the cells named five and eight to display the % value and 0 decimal places, e.g. 5%.

14.1.1

3


� 6 In the Information Table use a function to count the number of orders

received using the Company column.

12.1.4

7 Format the cells in the Order Value, Discount Value, and Total columns to display the $ sign (dollar) with 2 decimal places.

14.1.1

8 Copy down all formulae entered in steps 3 - 4 so that at least 12 rows of data can be entered.

12.1.1

9 Set your page orientation to landscape.

14.3.1

10 Save the data model and print a copy of the sheet showing the formulae used. Make sure that the contents of all cells are visible and that the printout fits onto a single printed page.

14.2.1 15.1.1

11 Enter the following data into the model to test that it works correctly:

12.1.2 12.2.1

Date Company Description Order Value

Discount Value

Total

15 June 2004 Stokers Plastic Pockets 912.5 15 June 2004 Caprossi Assorted Pens 125 28 June 2004 Aztec Supplies A4 Ring Binders 375 01 July 2004 Kwik Mart Notebooks 150 01 July 2004 Caprossi Rubbers 30 01 July 2004 Russell Card Cases 213.75 12 July 2004 Aztec Supplies Lever Arch Files 337 12 July 2004 Kwik Mart Keyrings 148.5 23 July 2004 Russell Card A4 Ruled Paper 437.5 08 August 2004 Cooper Briggs Assorted Cards 275 16 August 2004 Kwik Mart Sticky Tape 80 08 September 2004 Stokers File Separators 375

12 Save this data and print a copy showing the values. Make sure that the contents of all cells are visible and that the printout fits onto a single printed page.

14.2.1 15.1.1

13 Produce a printout showing only the rows where the Company is equal to Aztec Supplies or Stokers and the Order Value is greater than 345

13.1.1 15.1.1

4


WEBSITE AUTHORING Your manager has asked you to prepare web pages for a gym equipment company called Gymnastic. These pages will give information about the company and its products. � 1 Download the following files from

http://www.hothouse-design.co.uk/2004webb to your own work area: SWAB4TRD.HTM SWAB4INT.HTM SWAB4MEN.TXT SWAB4STP.JPG SWAB4ICO.JPG SWAB4TRD.JPG

16.1.1 16.2.1

2 Using a suitable software package, prepare the following styles for use within all pages on this website: • H1 – red, sans-serif font (e.g. Arial), largest (e.g. 45 point), bold,

centred • H2 – bright blue, serif (e.g. Times New Roman), bold, italic, smaller

(e.g. 18 point), left aligned • H3 – bright blue, sans-serif (e.g. Arial), smallest (e.g. 14 point), left

aligned Save the stylesheet and attach it to each web page as you create it.

17.1.1 17.1.2 17.1.3 17.1.4

3 Print a copy of the stylesheet that is to be attached to each page as html source code. Make sure that your name is on this printout.

21.1.1

4 Using a suitable software package, create a new homepage GMHOME.HTM This page will have a heading at the top, menu options on the left and a text/graphics area on the right. It should look like this:

18.1.1

5 Enter the heading GYMNASTIC as style H1.

17.1.4

6 Place the contents of SWAB4MEN.TXT down the left side of the page to create the menu options in style H2.

18.1.2 17.1.4

7 Create a hyperlink for the item Treadmill to point to the file SWAB4TRD.HTM which should open in a new window called EXTERNAL Note that the web page which you have linked to is not yet complete.

18.2.1 18.2.2

5


� 8 In the text/graphics area on the right, create a table which has 4 rows and

3 columns. Your table is going to look like this:

19.1.1

A B

D E C

F G

I J H

9 Merge rows 1 and 2 in the 3rd column creating cell C, as shown above. Merge rows 3 and 4 in the 3rd column creating cell H, as shown above.

19.1.3

10 Set a 3 point border for the table.

19.1.2

11 Using the contents of the file SWAB4INT.HTM

• place the text What we do into cell A and format this as style H2 • place the text which starts: We sell both...into cell B and format this

as style H3 • place the text How we do this into cell D and format this as style H2 • place the text which starts: Because we run …into cell E and format

this as style H3 • place the text Where we are based into cell F and format this as

style H2 • place the text which starts: Our Head Office…into cell G and format

this as style H3 • place the text How you can order into cell I and format this as style

H2 • place the text which starts: You can order…and…We also

produce….into cell J and format this as style H3.

17.1.4 18.1.1

12 Import the image SWAB4TRD.JPG and place it in cell C Import the image SWAB4STP.JPG and place it in cell H Make sure that the whole image is visible. Centre align both images.

20.1.1

13 Make sure that you have attached the stylesheet to this page and save it as GMHOME.HTM

Print this page as it is viewed in your browser. Print a copy of the HTML source.

21.1.1

14 Open the file SWAB4ICO.JPG in a suitable application. Change its size to 35 pixels wide and maintain the aspect ratio. Ensure that the colour depth is 256 colours (8 bit colour) and save the file as SWAB4ICO.GIF

20.2.1 20.2.2

6


� 15 Open the file SWAB4TRD.HTM

Import the image SWAB4TRD.JPG to the right cell of the table. Resize the image SWAB4TRD.JPG to 500 pixels wide and maintain the aspect ratio. Place this image to the right of the text in the table. Replace the text click here (at the bottom of the page) with the image SWAB4ICO.GIF Make this a link (in the same window) to the file GMHOME.HTM

20.1.1 20.1.2 20.2.1 20.2.2 20.2.1

16 Make sure that you have attached the stylesheet to this page and save it as SWAB4TRD.HTM Apply the styles H1, H2 and H3 to text on the page. Print this page as it is viewed in your browser. Print a copy of the HTML source.

17.1.4 21.1.1

7


PRESENTATION AUTHORING Your manager has asked you to set up a presentation for a stationery company called Pens4U. The medium for delivery will be a multimedia projector. Presenter notes need to be developed with the slides.

�

1 Set up a new presentation consisting of 3 slides. The slide master must have a light blue background and your name and today’s date in small black text placed in the top right corner. It must also contain a clipart image displaying office equipment or stationery, as a logo placed in the top left corner. The logo must be resized so that it does not overlay any slide text.

22.1.1 22.3.1

Set the following styles of text throughout the entire presentation: 2

Heading: Subheading: Bulleted list:

Dark blue, centred, large font (between 50 and 68 point)

Bright blue, centred, medium font (between 36 and 48 point)

Dark green, left aligned, small font (between 16 and 34 point) Use a bullet of your choice.

22.1.1

On the first slide:

3 Enter the heading Pens4U

22.2.1

4 Enter the subheading Stationery Suppliers below the heading.

22.2.1


Introduce yourself and your role within the company.

22.2.1

8



� 6 Enter the heading Paper Products and Costs in the same style as the first

slide.

22.2.1

7 Enter the following list on the left side of the slide, as shown below:

� Spiral notebooks � A4 ruled paper pads � Assorted A4 colour cards

22.2.1

8 Produce a vertical bar chart from the following data:

22.3.2

Product $

10 Spiral notebooks 90.00

25 A4 ruled paper pads 57.50

25 Assorted A4 colour cards 75.00

Place this chart on the right side of the slide. Do not display a legend.

9 Draw a thick dark blue line between the heading and the rest of the slide content.

22.3.3

10 The bullets should be set to appear one at a time.

23.2.1


We have a wide variety of products but keep our costs simple. Visit our website for special offers.

22.2.1

9


reproduced. The publishers would be pleased to hear from anyone whose rights they have unwittingly infringed. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2004 0418/4/J/04

On the third slide: � 12 Enter the heading On-line services in the same style as the first slide.

22.2.1

13 Enter the following list on the left side of the slide:

� paper & card � pens & pencils � envelopes � binders & files

22.2.1

14 Place a further clipart image showing stationery, e.g. pens, paper, on this page to the right of the bullets.

22.3.1


The company provides this service locally.

Pick up the phone or visit our website.

22.2.1

For the whole presentation: 16 Use the same transitional effect between each slide.

23.1.1 23.1.2

17 Use only one animation effect on the title of each slide.

23.2.1

18 Save the presentation using a new filename. Print the presentation in notes format showing all presenter notes.

24.1.1

(Please note – your tutor will need to assess the transitions and animations before sending in your work.)






2 hours 45 minutes








IB04 11_0418_04/2RP

© UCLES 2004

[Turn over


2

© UCLES 2004 0418/4/N/04 [Turn over

DATA ANALYSIS You work for a gym equipment company called Gymnastic. Your manager has asked you to calculate the value of current stock for exercise bikes and treadmills. � 1 Create a data model which looks like this:

12.1.1

Information Table

Mark-up 0.05 0.1

Number of items Treadmills

Date Equipment Type Purchase price

Mark-up price

Retail price

Treadmill

Treadmill

Exercise bike

Treadmill

Treadmill

Exercise bike

Treadmill

Exercise bike

Treadmill

Treadmill

Exercise bike

Exercise bike


Date The date the stock arrives Equipment The category of the equipment Type Equipment Details Purchase Price The initial cost of each item Mark-up Price The value added to each item based on the Purchase

price Retail price The retail value of stock including mark-up price Information Table Mark-up The percentage added on all stock items Number of items Count of the number of items in stock.

2 In the Information Table name the cell that holds the data for 0.05 as five

Name the cell that holds the data 0.1 as ten

These named cells will be used to calculate the Mark-up price.

12.1.3

3


�

3 In the main table in the cell under Mark-up Price, enter a formula to calculate the mark-up on the first stock item:

If the Purchase price is greater than 500 then multiply the Purchase price by the named cell ten to calculate the Mark-up price

If the Purchase price is not greater than 500 then multiply the Purchase price by the named cell five to calculate the Mark-up price

12.1.4

4 In the main table in the cell under Retail price enter a formula which adds the Mark-up price to the Purchase price

12.1.3

5 In the Information Table format the cells containing the data 0.05 and 0.1 to display the % value to 0 decimal places, e.g. 5%

14.1.1

6 In the Information Table use a function to count the number of Treadmills in stock. Place the result below the heading Treadmills

12.1.4

7 Format the cells in the Purchase price, Mark-up price, and Retail price columns to display the $ sign (dollar) with 2 decimal places.

14.1.1

8 Copy down all formulae entered in steps 3 - 4 so that at least 12 rows of data can be entered.

12.1.1


14.3.1

10 Save the data model and print a copy of the sheet showing the formulae used. Make sure that the contents of all cells are visible and that the printout fits on a single printed page.

14.2.1 15.1.1

11 Enter the following data into the model to test that it works correctly:

12.1.2 12.2.1

Date Equipment Type Purchase price

June 24, 2004 Treadmill Programmable 999

June 30, 2004 Treadmill Pulse controlled 2250

July 6, 2004 Exercise bike Fitness 350

July 15, 2004 Treadmill Manual 495

July 19, 2004 Treadmill Programmable folding 1870

July 20, 2004 Exercise bike Recumbent 570

July 26, 2004 Treadmill Electronic foldaway 2485

August 2, 2004 Exercise bike Magnetic 749

August 2, 2004 Treadmill Electronic foldaway 729

August 7, 2004 Treadmill Programmable 3195

August 17, 2004 Exercise bike Swing folding 599

August 22, 2004 Exercise bike Magnetic 279

12 Save this data and print a copy showing the values. Make sure that the contents of all cells are visible and that the printout fits on a single printed page.

14.2.1 15.1.1

13 Produce a printout showing only the rows where the Type contains foldaway or folding

13.1.1 15.1.1

4


WEBSITE AUTHORING Your manager has asked you to prepare web pages for a stationery company called Pens4U. These pages will give information about the company and its products. � 1 Download the following files from

http://www.hothouse-design.co.uk/2004weba to your own work area: SWAA4PEN.HTM SWAA4INT.HTM SWAA4MEN.TXT SWAA4PST.JPG SWAA4ICO.JPG SWAA4PEN.JPG

16.1.1 16.2.1

2 Using a suitable software package, prepare the following styles for use within all pages on this website: • H1 – dark blue, serif font (e.g. Times New Roman), largest (e.g. 45

point), bold, centred • H2 – bright blue, sans-serif (e.g. Arial), bold, italic, smaller (e.g. 18

point), left aligned • H3 – bright green, sans-serif (e.g. Arial), smallest (e.g. 14 point), fully

justified Save the stylesheet and attach it to each web page as you create it.

17.1.1 17.1.2 17.1.3 17.1.4

3 Print a copy of the stylesheet that is to be attached to each page as html source code. Make sure your name is on this printout.

21.1.1

4 Using a suitable software package, create a new homepage PUHOME.HTM This page will have a heading at the top, menu options on the left and a text/graphics area on the right. It should look like this:

18.1.1

5 Enter the heading PENS4U as style H1.

17.1.4

6 Place the contents of SWAA4MEN.TXT down the left side of the page to create the menu options in style H2.

18.1.2 17.1.4

7 Create a hyperlink for the item Pens to point to the file SWAA4PEN.HTM which should open in a new window called EXTERNAL Note that the web page which you have linked to is not yet complete.

18.2.1 18.2.2

5


� 8 In the text/graphics area on the right, create a table which has 4 columns

and 3 rows. Your table is going to look like this:

19.1.1

A B

E C D

F G

H I J K

9 Merge the top four cells of the table into two columns A B, as shown above.

Split the last two cells in row two to make two columns and two rows E F G, as shown above.

Merge the top two cells, which have just been split into two, into one cell E, as shown above.

19.1.3

10 Set a 4 point border size for the table.

19.1.2

11 Using the contents of the file SWAA4INT.HTM

• place the heading which starts: POSTAGE COSTS in cell B and format this as style H2

• place the text BRUNEI into cell C and format this as style H2 • place the text U.S.A. into cell D and format this as style H2 • place the text which starts: REST OF WORLD into cell E and format

this as style H2 • place the text AIRMAIL into cell F and format this as style H3 • place the text SURFACE MAIL into cell G and format this as style

H3 • place the rest of the text as one price in each cell and format this

row as style H3: US$5.50 in cell H US$6.50 in cell I US$8.00 in cell J US$5.00 in cell K

17.1.4 18.1.1

12 Import the image SWAA4PST.JPG and place it in the first row to the left of the heading text. Make sure that the whole image is visible.

20.1.1

13 Make sure that you have attached the stylesheet to this page and save it as PUHOME.HTM


21.1.1

14 Open the file SWAA4ICO.JPG in a suitable application. Change its size to 35 pixels wide and maintain the aspect ratio. Ensure that the colour depth is 256 colours (8 bit colour) and save the file as SWAA4ICO.GIF

20.2.1 20.2.2

6


� 15 Open the file SWAA4PEN.HTM

Import the image SWAA4PEN.JPG to the right cell of the table. Resize the image SWAA4PEN.JPG to 300 pixels wide and maintain the aspect ratio. Place this image to the right of the text in the table. Replace the text click here (at the bottom of the page) with the image SWAA4ICO.GIF Make this a link (in the same window) to the file PUHOME.HTM

20.1.1 20.1.2 20.2.1 20.2.2 18.2.1

16 Make sure that you have attached the stylesheet to this page and save it as SWAA4PEN.HTM Apply the styles H1, H2 and H3 to text on the page. Print this page as it is viewed in your browser. Print a copy of the HTML source.

17.1.4 21.1.1

7


PRESENTATION AUTHORING Your manager has asked you to set up a presentation for a gym equipment company called Gymnastic. The medium for delivery will be a multimedia projector. Presenter notes need to be developed with the slides.

�

1 Set up a new presentation consisting of 3 slides. The slide master must have a light green background and your name and today’s date in small black text placed in the top right corner. It must also contain clipart from a sports category as a logo placed in the top left corner. The logo must be resized so that it does not overlay any slide text.

22.1.1 22.3.1



Dark green, centred, large font (between 50 and 68 point)

Bright green, centred, medium font (between 36 and 48 point)

Bright green, left aligned, small font (between 16 and 34 point) Use a bullet of your choice.

22.1.1

On the first slide:

3 Enter the heading Gymnastic

22.2.1

4 Enter the subheading Gym Equipment Suppliers below the heading.

22.2.1

5 Add the following presenter notes to this slide: Introduce yourself and your role within the company.

22.2.1

8



� 6 Enter the heading Products and Costs in the same style as the first slide.

22.2.1


� treadmill � exercise bike � home gym � rowing machine

22.2.1

8 Produce a vertical bar chart from the following data:

22.3.2

Product $

treadmill 1100

exercise bike 259

home gym 2475

rowing machine 550

Place this chart on the right side of the slide. Do not display a legend.

9 Add a thick dark green horizontal line between the heading and the rest of the slide content.

22.3.3


23.2.1


We have a wide variety of products. Visit one of our stores soon.

22.2.1

9


reproduced. The publishers would be pleased to hear from anyone whose rights they have unwittingly infringed. University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2004 0418/4/N/04

On the third slide: � 12 Enter the heading We deliver to: in the same style as the first slide.

22.2.1

13 Enter the following list on the right side of the slide:

� Brunei � Greece � Italy � Malaysia � Iran

22.2.1

14 Place a further clipart image showing countries, e.g. world, city, on this page to the left of the bullets.

22.3.1


The company has branches in all these locations.

Staff are just waiting for your visit.

22.2.1


23.1.1 23.1.2


23.2.1


24.1.1






May/June 2005

2 hours 45 minutes


READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Make sure that your name, centre number and candidate number are printed on each printout that you are






IB05 06_0418_03/3RP

CIE 2005

[Turn over


2

© UCLES 2005 0418/03/J/05 [Turn Over

You work for an international company called Hothouse Design. You are going to help to plan an advertising campaign for a shop selling mobile phones. TASK A - COMMUNICATION � 1 Send a message to [email protected] which contains the subject line


1.2.1


1.1.1 1.4.1 2.1.1 2.2.1 2.3.1


1.2.1 1.3.1


11.1.1

3

© UCLES 2005 0418/03/J/05 [Turn Over

TASK B – DOCUMENT PRODUCTION You are now going to edit a document about the mobile phones. �

5 Using a suitable software package, load the file SCA5MOB.TXT

3.1.1


4.1.1


4.1.2


4.1.3


4.1.4


4.1.5


4.1.6


5.5.1

13 Insert the heading Phoney Phones Marketing Strategy at the top of the document.

3.2.1


4.1.6 5.5.1


television radio billboards internet

5.2.1


5.1.1

17 Insert a page break before the paragraph which starts: Each of these areas needs to be thoroughly investigated in terms of audience impact…

5.4.1



11.1.1

4

© UCLES 2005 0418/03/J/05 [Turn Over


20 Using a suitable database package, import the file SCA5MOB.CSV

6.1.1


6.2.1

Make Model Weight Length Width Height Talk time

Standby time

Display

Nokia 6510 84 97 47 17 135 350 Mono

Nokia 3510 105 118 42 18 270 312 Mono

Nokia 5210 92 106 45 20 230 170 Mono


22 Save the data.

11.1.1


• shows only the phones where the Make is Nokia


• sorts the data into ascending order of Talk time (with 135 at the top)


• includes the heading Nokia phones in stock at the top of the page


8.2.1 9.1.1 8.1.1 9.1.3 9.1.2 9.1.3


11.1.2


• shows only the phones where the Length is less than 100 and the Display is Colour

• shows only the fields Make, Model, Weight, Length

• is sorted into descending order of Make (with Samsung at the top)

• has the average Weight value calculated at the bottom of the Weight column

• includes the heading Small colour phones at the top of the page


8.2.1 9.1.1 8.1.1 7.1.1 9.1.2 9.1.3


11.1.2

27 Select from all the data, only the phones:

• where the Make is Sagem or NEC or Trium

• sorted into ascending order of Make (with NEC at the top)

• showing only the fields Make, Model, Talk time, Standby time

8.2.1

8.1.1

9.1.1


11.1.3

5

© UCLES 2005 0418/03/J/05 [Turn Over



3.1.1


5.4.1


4.1.2


4.1.3


4.1.4


4.1.5


4.1.6


5.5.1

Create a table with 5 rows and 3 columns after the sentence: Please note your roles in this investigation and the mobile phone numbers of each of the team members which are identified in the following table: Enter the following data into this table:

Name Role Mobile

Jenny Television and radio 0979 797979

Juan Television and radio 0979 123456

Rochelle Billboards 0979 111122

Xavier Internet 0979 888888

37

5.3.1 3.2.1

38 Import a graphic image showing a mobile phone (from clip art, scanner, digital camera or elsewhere), and place this in the top left corner of page 1.

10.1.1




• it appears below the title.


3.3.2

6

Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.


© UCLES 2005 0418/03/J/05


Insert this data as a table after the paragraph which ends: …as well as obtaining product summaries on all other in-stock products from our clients. Make sure there is one blank line above and below the table.

10.1.1





• there are no orphans.

Ensure that there are no blank pages.

5.4.1


11.1.1






2 hours 45 minutes


READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Make sure that your name, centre number and candidate number are printed on each page that you are






IB05 11_0418_03/RP © UCLES 2005

[Turn over


2

UCLES 2005 0418/03/O/N/05 [Turn over



1.2.1


1.1.1 1.4.1 2.1.1 2.2.1 2.3.1


1.2.1 1.3.1


11.1.1

3



5 Using a suitable software package, load the file SCB5MOB.TXT

3.1.1


4.1.1


4.1.2

8 Place your name left aligned, the page number centre aligned and today’s date right aligned in the header. Make sure that the header is displayed on each page.

4.1.3


4.1.4


4.1.5


4.1.6


5.5.1

13 Insert the heading Phoney Phones briefing notes 3 at the top of the document.

3.2.1

14 Centre the heading and select a different font from the rest of the text. Change the size of the heading to 18 point and make it italic and underlined.

4.1.6 5.5.1


Vodaphone O2 Orange Virgin

5.2.1


5.1.1

17 Insert a page break before the paragraph which starts: This could be mutually beneficial; the provider would get reduced cost advertising. …

5.4.1



11.1.1

4



20 Using a suitable database package, import the file SCB5MOB.CSV

6.1.1


6.2.1

Make Model Weight Length Width Height Talk time Standby time Display

Nokia 8910 110 141 46 22 240 300 Mono

Nokia 5510 115 134 58 28 270 260 Mono

Nokia 8210 79 102 45 17 200 150 Mono

21


22 Save the data.

11.1.1








8.2.1

9.1.1

8.1.1

9.1.3 9.1.2

9.1.3 24 Save and print this report.

11.1.2


• shows only the phones where the Weight is less than 95 and the Display is Colour

• shows only the fields Make, Model, Weight, Length

• is sorted into descending order of Make (with Sagem at the top)


• includes the heading Lightweight colour phones at the top of the page


8.2.1

9.1.1

8.1.1

7.1.1 9.1.2

9.1.3


11.1.2


• where the Make is VTech or Handspring or Sagem

• sorted into ascending order of Make (with Handspring at the top)


8.2.1

8.1.1

9.1.1


11.1.3

5




3.1.1


5.4.1


4.1.2

32 Move the page numbering so that it is right aligned and the date so that it is centre aligned in the header of each page.

4.1.3


4.1.4

34 Set the text to double line spacing.

4.1.5


4.1.6


5.5.1

37 Create a table with 5 rows and 3 columns after the sentence: Some of the summary details of key areas are listed in this table: Enter the following data into this table:

5.3.1 3.2.1

Age group Social Requirements

7-14 Mixed gender Fashion, games, accessories

15-21 Female Fashion, accessories, text rates, call rates

22-30 Single Fashion, call rates, text rates, accessories

31-50 Parents Call rates, same network

38 Import a graphic image showing a mobile phone (from clip art, scanner, digital camera or elsewhere), and place this in the bottom right corner of page 2.

10.1.1





3.3.2

6



UCLES 2005 0418/03/O/N/05


Insert this data as a table after the paragraph which ends: Perhaps we could consider these:

10.1.1





• there are no orphans Ensure that there are no blank pages.

5.4.1


11.1.1





May/June 2005

2 hours 45 minutes


READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Make sure that your name, centre number and candidate number are printed on each printout that you are






IB05 06_0418_04/3RP

CIE 2005

[Turn over


2

© UCLES 2005 0418/04/J/05 [Turn Over

DATA ANAYLSIS You work for an electrical retail company called Electry. Your manager has asked you to calculate the current stock position for stock items. All currency values should be in dollars with the $ sign visible. � 1 Create a data model which looks like this:

1.1.1

Information Table

Mark-up 0.03

0.05

Number of items

Small

Large

Date Item Size of item Purchase Increase Sale

Café espresso

Freezer

Fridge

Fridge/Freezer

Heater

Iron

Kettle

Microwave

Oven

Tumble Dryer

Vacuum Cleaner

Washing Machine


Date Date of stock in Item The type of electrical equipment Size of item Whether a large item or a small item Purchase The price paid for each item Increase The value added to each item based on the

Purchase price. If the Purchase price is greater than or equal to 300, then the increase is 5%. Otherwise the increase is 3%.

Sale The price each item is sold at, including the increase Information Table Mark-up The percentage increase added on all items Number of items Count of the number of items.

3

© UCLES 2005 0418/04/J/05 [Turn Over

� 2 In the Information Table, name the cell that holds the data 0.03 three.

Name the cell that holds the data 0.05 five.

These named cells will be used to calculate the Increase

1.1.3

6 In the Information Table, use Countif to count the number of items where the Size of item is Small. Place the result in the cell to the right of the heading Small.

In the Information Table, use Countif to count the number of items where the Size of item is Large. Place the result in the cell to the right of the heading Large.

1.1.4

7 Format the cells in the Date column to a long date format (for example March 12, 2004).

3.1.1

8 Format the cells in the Purchase, Increase, and Sale columns to display the $ sign (dollar) with 2 decimal places.

3.1.1

9 Copy down all formulae entered in steps 3 - 4 so that 12 rows of data can be entered.

1.1.1


3.3.1


3.2.14.1.1

3 In the main table in the cell under Increase, enter a formula using IF. This formula calculates the mark-up on the first item.

If the Purchase is greater than or equal to 300 then multiply the Purchase by the named cell five to calculate the Increase

If the Purchase is less than 300 then multiply the Purchase by the named cell three to calculate the Increase

1.1.4

4 In the main table in the cell under Sale, enter a formula which adds the Increase to the Purchase

1.1.3

5 In the Information Table, format the cells containing the data 0.03 and 0.05 to display the % value with 0 decimal places (for example 5%).

3.1.1

4

© UCLES 2005 0418/04/J/05 [Turn Over

� 12 Enter the following data into the model to test that it works correctly:

1.1.21.2.1

Date Item Size of item Purchase

January 24, 2005 Café espresso Small 29

January 30, 2005 Freezer Large 399

February 6, 2005 Fridge Large 305

February 15, 2005 Fridge/Freezer Large 560

March 19, 2005 Heater Small 20

March 20, 2005 Iron Small 15

March 26, 2005 Kettle Small 25

April 2, 2005 Microwave Small 250

May 2, 2005 Oven Large 678

May 7, 2005 Tumble Dryer Large 299

May 17, 2005 Vacuum Cleaner Small 78

May 22, 2005 Washing Machine Large 695

13 Save this data and print a copy showing the values. Make sure that the

contents of all cells are visible and that the printout fits onto a single printed page.

3.2.14.1.1

14 Produce a printout showing only the rows where the Size of item contains Small

2.1.14.1.1

15 Produce a printout showing only the rows where the Date is after 13 March 2005 and the Purchase is greater than 500

2.1.14.1.1

5

© UCLES 2005 0418/03/J/05 [Turn Over

WEBSITE AUTHORING Your manager has asked you to prepare web pages for a camera equipment company called Dygitell. These pages will give information about the company and its products. � 1 Download the following files from

http://www.hothouse-design.co.uk/2005webb to your own work area: SWAB5CAM.HTM SWAB5INT.HTM SWAB5MAK.TXT SWAB5MEN.TXT SWAB5CAM.JPG SWAB5ICO.JPG SWAB5PHO.JPG

1.1.11.2.1

2 Using a suitable software package, prepare the following styles for use within all pages on this website: • h1 – dark blue, sans-serif font (for example Arial), largest (for example 45

point), bold, centred • h2 – bright blue, serif (for example Times New Roman), bold, smaller (for

example 18 point), left aligned • h3 – bright blue, sans-serif (for example Arial), smallest (for example 14

point), left aligned Save the stylesheet and attach it to each web page as you create it.

2.1.12.1.22.1.32.1.4


6.1.1

4 Using a suitable software package, create a new homepage SWAB5HM.HTM This page will have menu options at the top, headings on the left, a text/graphics area on the right. It should look like this:

3.1.1

5 Enter the heading DYGITELL as style h1.

2.1.4

6 Place the contents of SWAB5MEN.TXT below the heading DYGITELL to create the menu options in style h2. Place the contents of SWAB5MAK.TXT down the left side of the page in style h3.

3.1.22.1.4

6

© UCLES 2005 0418/04/J/05 [Turn Over

� 7 Create a hyperlink for the menu item DYGITELL CAMERAS to point to the file

SWAB5CAM.HTM which should open in a new window called EXTERNAL Note that the web page which you have linked to is not yet complete.

3.2.13.2.2

8 In the text/graphics area on the right, create a table which has 4 rows and 3 columns.

4.1.1

9 Merge rows 1 and 2 in the 3rd column creating C as shown. Merge row 2 in the 1st and 2nd column creating D as shown. Merge row 3 in the 2nd and 3rd column creating F as shown. Merge row 4 in the 1st, 2nd and 3rd column creating G as shown. The table should look like this:

4.1.3

A B

D

C

E F

G


4.1.2

11 Using the contents of the file SWAB5INT.HTM:

• place the text What we do into cell A and format this as style h2 • place the text which starts We sell digital… into cell B and format this as

style h3 • place the text We have many… into cell D and format this as style h2 • place the text You can order… into cell E and format this as style h2 • place the text Through our… to By phone … into cell F and format this as

style h3 • place the text In all cases… into cell G and format this as style h2.

2.1.43.1.1

12 Import the image SWAB5CAM.JPG and place it in cell C. Set the height to 250 pixels and maintain the aspect ratio on the image. Make sure that the whole image is visible. Centre align the image.

5.1.15.1.25.2.1

13 Make sure that you have attached the stylesheet to this page and save it as SWAB5HM.HTM Print this page as it is viewed in your browser. Print a copy of the HTML source.

6.1.1

14 Open the file SWAB5ICO.JPG in a suitable application. Change its size to 35 pixels wide and maintain the aspect ratio. Ensure that the colour depth is 256 colours (8 bit colour) and save the file as SWAB5ICO.GIF

5.2.15.2.2

7

© UCLES 2005 0418/03/J/05 [Turn Over

� 15 Open the file SWAB5CAM.HTM

Import the image SWAB5PHO.JPG to the right cell of the table. Resize the image SWAB5PHO.JPG to 400 pixels wide and maintain the aspect ratio. Place this image to the right of the text in the table.

5.1.15.1.25.2.15.2.2

16 Replace the text click here (at the bottom of the page) with the image SWAB5ICO.GIF Make this a link (in the same window) to the file SWAB5HM.HTM

3.2.13.2.25.1.1

17 Make sure that you have attached the stylesheet to this page. Save the page as SWAB5CAM.HTM Print this page as it is viewed in your browser. Print a copy of the HTML source.

2.1.46.1.1

On your printout highlight those portions of the code which show that: • the external stylesheet is attached to each webpage • the table borders are set to 3 point • SWAB5CAM.JPG is resized to 250 pixels high • SWAB5CAM.JPG is centre aligned • the hyperlink from DYGITELL CAMERAS opens SWAB5CAM.HTM in a new window called

EXTERNAL • SWAB5PHO.JPG is resized to 400 pixels wide • SWAB5ICO.JPG has been changed to .gif format • SWAB5ICO.GIF is resized to 35 pixels • SWAB5ICO.GIF hyperlinks to SWAB5HM.HTM

8

© UCLES 2005 0418/04/J/05 [Turn Over


Your manager has asked you to set up a presentation for a mobile phone company called Dygitell. The medium for delivery will be a multimedia projector. Presenter notes need to be produced with the slides.

�

1 Set up a new presentation consisting of 3 slides. The slide master must have a very light blue background and your name and today’s date in small black font placed in the top right corner. It must also contain clipart of a telephone as a logo placed in the bottom right corner.

The logo must be resized so that it will not overlay any text or graphics on any slide.

Include the slide number in the centre of the footer.

1.1.1 1.3.1



Dark blue, centre aligned, large font (between 50 and 72 point)


Bright blue, left aligned, small font (between 16 and 32 point). Use a bullet of your choice.

1.1.1

On the first slide:

3 Enter the heading Dygitell

1.2.1

4 Enter the subheading Suppliers of a wide range of mobile phones below the heading.

1.2.1


1.2.1

9

© UCLES 2005 0418/03/J/05 [Turn Over


� 6 Enter the heading Bluetooth mobile phones in the same style as the first

slide.

1.2.1

7 Enter the following bulleted list on the right side of the slide.

� Nokia � Ericsson � O2 � Motorola

� Panasonic

1.2.1

8 Create a vertical bar chart from the following data:

1.3.2

Product $

Nokia 250

Ericsson 560

O2 625

Motorola 675

Panasonic 375

Place the chart on the left side of the slide. Do not display a legend.

9 Add a thick dark blue horizontal line between the heading and the rest of the slide content.

1.3.3


2.2.1


We stock mobiles for all technologies. Visit our website www.dygitell.com

1.2.1

10



© UCLES 2005 0418/04/J/05

On the third slide: � 12 Enter the heading We guarantee in the same style as the first slide.

1.2.1


� Full refund if not completely satisfied � Trade in of your old mobile phone � 50 days free insurance cover

1.2.1

14 Place a different clipart image showing a telephone. Place this to the right of the bulleted list.

1.3.1


We feel that our service is the best.

Why waste time looking everywhere when we have everything you need?

1.2.1


2.1.12.1.2

17 Use the same animation effect on the title of each slide.

2.2.1

18 Save the presentation using a new filename. Print the presentation showing all presenter notes.

3.1.1







2 hours 45 minutes


READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST Make sure that your name, centre number and candidate number are printed on each printout that you

are asked to produce. Carry out every instruction in each task. Tasks are numbered on the left hand side of the page, so that you can see what to do, step by step. On the





IB05 11_0418_04/3RP

UCLES 2005

[Turn over


2

© UCLES 2005 0418/04/N/05 [Turn Over

DATA ANALYSIS You work for a camera company called Dygitell. Your manager has asked you to calculate the retail price of current stock for digital cameras. All currency values should be in dollars with the $ sign visible.

� 1 Create a data model which looks like this:

12.1.1

Information Table

Mark-up 0.05

0.07

Number of types

Novice

Expert

Date Make Type Purchase Increase Sale

Argus

Canon

Casio

Fuji

Kodak

Konica

Minolta

Nikon

Olympus

Pentax

Sony

Toshiba


Date Date of stock in Make The make of the camera Type Camera for either the novice or the expert Purchase The price paid for each camera Increase The value added to each item based on the


Sale The price each camera is sold for, including the increase

Information Table: Mark-up The percentage increase added to the price of all

stock items Number of types Count the number of items of each type.

3

© UCLES 2005 0418/04/N/05 [Turn Over

� 2 In the Information Table name the cell that holds the data 0.05 five

Name the cell that holds the data 0.07 seven


12.1.3

6 In the Information Table, use Countif to count the number of cameras where the Type is Novice. Place the result in the cell to the right of the heading Novice.

In the Information Table, use Countif to count the number of cameras where the Type is Expert. Place the result in the cell to the right of the heading Expert.

12.1.4

7 Format the cells in the Date column to a long date format (for example March 12, 2004).

14.1.1

8 Format the cells in the Purchase, Increase, and Sale columns to display the $ (dollar) sign with 2 decimal places.

14.1.1

9 Copy down all formulae entered in steps 3 – 4, so that 12 rows of data can be entered.

12.1.1


14.3.1


14.2.1 15.1.1

3 In the main table in the cell under Increase, enter a formula using IF. This formula calculates the mark-up on the first stock item.

If the Purchase is greater than or equal to 300 then multiply the Purchase by the named cell seven to calculate the Increase

If the Purchase is less than 300 then multiply the Purchase by the named cell five to calculate the Increase

12.1.4

4 In the main table in the cell under Sale enter a formula which adds the Increase to the Purchase

12.1.3

5 In the Information Table, format the cells containing the data 0.05 and 0.07 to display the % value with 0 decimal places (for example 5%).

14.1.1

4

© UCLES 2005 0418/04/N/05 [Turn Over


12.1.212.2.1

Date Make Type Purchase

January 24, 2005 Argus Novice 199

January 30, 2005 Canon Novice 399

February 6, 2005 Casio Novice 305

February 15, 2005 Fuji Expert 560

March 19, 2005 Kodak Novice 345

March 20, 2005 Konica Novice 314

March 26, 2005 Minolta Novice 399

April 2, 2005 Nikon Expert 685

May 2, 2005 Olympus Expert 1299

May 7, 2005 Pentax Novice 299

May 17, 2005 Sony Expert 595

May 22, 2005 Toshiba Expert 1287



14.2.1 15.1.1

14 Produce a printout showing only the rows where the Type contains Novice

13.1.1 15.1.1

15 Produce a printout showing only the rows where the Date is after 1 May 2005 and the Purchase is greater than 350

13.1.1 15.1.1

5

© UCLES 2005 0418/04/N/05 [Turn Over

WEBSITE AUTHORING Your manager has asked you to prepare web pages for an electrical goods retail company called Electry. These pages will give information about the company’s products. � 1 Download the following files from

http://www.hothouse-design.co.uk/2005weba to your own work area: SWAA5INT.HTM SWAA5ELE.HTM SWAA5MAK.TXT SWAA5MEN.TXT SWAA5FRI.JPG SWAA5ICO.JPG SWAA5DIS.JPG

16.1.1 16.2.1

2 Using a suitable software package, prepare the following styles for use within all pages on this website: • h1 – dark green, sans-serif font (for example Arial), largest (for example

45 point), bold, centred • h2 – bright green, serif (for example Times New Roman), bold, smaller

(for example 18 point), left aligned • h3 – bright green, sans-serif (for example Arial), smallest (for example

14 point), left aligned Save the stylesheet and attach it to each web page as you create it.

17.1.1 17.1.2 17.1.3 17.1.4


21.1.1

4 Using a suitable software package, create a new homepage SWAA5HM.HTM This page will have menu options at the top, headings on the left, a text/graphics area on the right and a home icon at the bottom left. It should look like this:

18.1.1

5 Enter the heading ELECTRY as style h1.

17.1.4

6

© UCLES 2005 0418/04/N/05 [Turn Over

� 6 Place the contents of SWAA5MEN.TXT below the heading ELECTRY to

create the menu options in style h2. Place the contents of SWAA5MAK.TXT down the left side of the page in style h3.

18.1.2 17.1.4

7 Create a hyperlink for the menu item Dishwasher to point to the file SWAA5ELE.HTM which should open in a new window called EXTERNAL Note that the web page which you have linked to is not yet complete.

18.2.1 18.2.2

8 In the text/graphics area on the right, create a table which has 4 rows and 3 columns.

19.1.1

A B

D C

E F

G

9 Merge rows 1 and 2 in the 3rd column creating C as shown. Merge row 2 in the 1st and 2nd column creating D as shown. Merge row 3 in the 2nd and 3rd column creating F as shown. Merge row 4 in the 1st, 2nd and 3rd column creating G as shown.

19.1.3


19.1.2

11 Using the contents of the file SWAA5INT.HTM:

• place the text What we do into cell A and format this as style h2 • place the text which starts We sell a variety… into cell B and format this

as style h3 • place the text We have many… into cell D and format this as style h2 • place the text You can order… into cell E and format this as style h2 • place the text Through our… to By phone … into cell F and format this

as style h3 • place the text In all cases… into cell G and format this as style h2.

17.1.4 18.1.1

12 Import the image SWAA5FRI.JPG and place it in cell C.

Set the height to 250 pixels and maintain the aspect ratio on both images.

Make sure that the whole image is visible.

Centre align the image.

20.1.1 20.1.2 20.2.1

13 Make sure that you have attached the stylesheet to this page and save it as SWAA5HM.HTM Print this page as it is viewed in your browser. Print a copy of the HTML source.

21.1.1


20.2.1 20.2.2

7

© UCLES 2005 0418/04/N/05 [Turn Over

� 15 Open the file SWAA5ELE.HTM

Import the image SWAA5DIS.JPG to the right cell of the table. Resize the image SWAA5DIS.JPG to 500 pixels wide and maintain the aspect ratio.

20.1.1 20.1.2 20.2.1 20.2.2

16 Replace the text click here (at the bottom of the page) with the image SWAA5ICO.GIF Make this a link (in the same window) to the file SWAA5HM.HTM

18.2.1 18.2.2 20.1.1

17 Make sure that you have attached the stylesheet to this page. Save the page as SWAA5ELE.HTM Print this page as it is viewed in your browser. Print a copy of the HTML source.

17.1.4 21.1.1

After the examination time On your printout highlight those portions of the code which show that: • the external stylesheet is attached to each webpage • the table borders are set to 3 point • SWAA5FRI.JPG is resized to 250 pixels high • SWAA5FRI.JPG is centre aligned • the hyperlink from Dishwasher opens SWAA5ELE.HTM in a new window called EXTERNAL • SWAA5DIS.JPG is resized to 500 pixels wide • SWAA5ICO.JPG has been changed to .gif format • SWAA5ICO.GIF is resized to 35 pixels • SWAA5ICO.GIF hyperlinks to SWAA5HM.HTM

8

© UCLES 2005 0418/04/N/05 [Turn Over

PRESENTATION AUTHORING Your manager has asked you to set up a presentation for a camera equipment company called Dygitell. The medium for delivery will be a multimedia projector. Presenter notes need to be produced with the slides.

�

1 Set up a new presentation consisting of 3 slides. The slide master must have a very light blue background and your name and today’s date in small black font placed in the top left corner. It must also contain clipart of a camera as a logo placed in the bottom right corner.



22.1.1 22.3.1



Dark blue, centre aligned, large font (between 50 and 72 point)


Bright blue, left aligned, small font (between 16 and 32 point). Use a bullet of your choice.

22.1.1

On the first slide:

3 Enter the heading Dygitell

22.2.1

4 Enter the subheading Suppliers of quality cameras below the heading.

22.2.1


22.2.1

9

© UCLES 2005 0418/04/N/05 [Turn Over


� 6 Enter the heading Price of cameras for Experts in the same style as the

first slide.

22.2.1

7 Enter the following bulleted list on the right side of the slide:

� Fuji � Nikon � Olympus � Sony � Toshiba

22.2.1

8 Create a vertical bar chart from the following data:

22.3.2

Product $

Fuji 599.20

Nikon 732.95

Olympus 1389.93

Sony 636.65

Toshiba 1377.09

Place the chart on the left side of the slide. Do not display a legend.

9 Add a thick dark blue horizontal line between the heading and the rest of the slide content.

22.3.3


23.2.1


We have cameras to suit all users. Visit our website www.dygitell.com

22.2.1

10



© UCLES 2005 0418/04/N/05

On the third slide: � 12 Enter the heading What we guarantee in the same style as the first

slide.

22.2.1


� Full refund if not completely satisfied � Trade-in of old camera � 40 days free insurance cover

22.2.1

14 Place a different clipart image showing a camera. Place this to the right of the bulleted list.

22.3.1


We feel that our service is better than any other.

Why waste time looking everywhere when we have everything you need?

22.2.1


23.1.1 23.1.2


23.2.1


24.1.1


Centre Number Candidate Number Name




Paper 2 Practical Test May/June 2006

2 hour 45 minutes



Make sure that your Centre number, candidate number and name are clearly visible on every printout, before it is sent to the printer.


Tasks are numbered on the left hand side of the page, so that you can see what to do, step by step. On the right hand side of the page for each task, you will find a box which you can tick (�) when you have completed the task; this checklist will help you track your progress through the assignment.

Before each printout you should proof-read the document to make sure that you have followed all instructions carefully.



IB06 06_0418_02/6RP © UCLES 2006

[Turn over


2

© UCLES 2006 0418/02/M/J/06



1.2.1


1.1.1 1.4.1 2.1.1 2.2.1 2.3.1


1.2.1 1.3.1

4 Print a copy of this e-mail, showing clearly that the attachment is present. Then send the e-mail.

11.1.1

3

© UCLES 2006 0418/02/M/J/06 [Turn over


5 Using a suitable software package, load the file SCA6MANU.TXT

3.1.1


4.1.1


4.1.2

8 Place your name left aligned and today’s date right aligned in the header. Place the page number right aligned in the footer. Make sure that the headers and footers are displayed on each page.

4.1.3

9 Set the top, bottom, left and right margins to 3.5 centimetres.

4.1.4


4.1.5


4.1.6


5.5.1

13 Insert the heading Phase 3 for Quattichem at the top of the document.

3.2.1


4.1.6 5.5.1


Thailand Indonesia South Africa Switzerland

5.2.1


5.1.1

17 Insert a page break before the paragraph which starts…Most of these materials will be transported in bulk powder.

5.4.1



11.1.1

4

© UCLES 2006 0418/02/M/J/06


20 Using a suitable database package, import the file SCA6AFAS.CSV

6.1.1


6.2.1


Azerbaijan Asia 7.7 89 2.6 105 86

Kazakhstan Asia 17 6 5.93 40 70

Laos Asia 5.2 23 0.04 40 20


22 Save the data.

11.1.1


• shows only the countries where the Region is Asia


• sorts the data into ascending alphabetical order of Country (with Afghanistan at the top)


• includes the heading Asia Region at the top of the page


8.1.1 8.2.1 9.1.1 9.1.2 9.1.3


11.1.2


• shows only the countries where the Density is less than 10 and the Imports are less than 60

• shows only the fields Country, Region, Density, Imports


• has the minimum Imports value calculated at the bottom of the Imports column

• includes the heading Low density and few imports at the top of the page


7.1.1 8.1.1 8.2.1 9.1.1 9.1.2 9.1.3


11.1.2


• where Imports are greater than 10 and less than 300

• with the Population of less than 3

• showing only the fields Country, Region, Population, Imports

8.2.1 9.1.1


11.1.3

5


TASK D – INTEGRATION You are now going to make some changes to the document which you saved in Task B. �


3.1.1

30 Remove the page break inserted in Task B Step 17.

5.4.1


4.1.2

32 Move the page numbering so that it is centre aligned in the footer of each page.

4.1.3


4.1.4


4.1.5


4.1.6


5.5.1

37 Create a table with 5 rows and 3 columns after the sentence….New team allocations will be: Enter the following data into this table:

5.3.1 3.2.1

David Sofia Safraz

Anne Akiko Kelvin

Camilla William Jamal

Li Jo

Michelle Gunther

38 Import a graphic image showing construction or building (from clip art, scanner,

digital camera or elsewhere), and place this in the top left corner of page 1.

10.1.1





• it is in line with the left margin

• it is in line with the top of the text


3.3.2

6


University of Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.

© UCLES 2006 0418/02/M/J/06

� 40 You now need to import the data which you saved at the end of Task C. Insert

this data as a table after the paragraph which ends…The starting point for this team will be the following countries: Make sure there is one blank line above and below the table.

10.1.1






5.4.1


11.1.1

Centre Number Candidate Number Name




Paper 2 Practical Test October/November 2006

2 hours 45 minutes



Make sure that your Centre number, candidate number and name are clearly visible on every printout, before it is sent to the printer. Printouts with handwritten information will not be marked.






IB06 11_0418_02/5RP © UCLES 2006

[Turn over


2

© UCLES 2006 0418/02/O/N/06



1.2.1


1.1.1 1.4.1 2.1.1 2.2.1 2.3.1


1.2.1 1.3.1


11.1.1

3

© UCLES 2006 0418/02/O/N/06 [Turn over


5 Using a suitable software package, load the file SCB6MOB.TXT

3.1.1


4.1.1


4.1.2

8 Place your name centre aligned in the header. Place the page number left aligned and today’s date right aligned in the footer. Make sure that headers and footers are displayed on each page.

4.1.3


4.1.4


4.1.5

11 Make the text fully justified.

4.1.6


5.5.1

13 Insert the heading Phoney Phones research notes at the top of the document.

3.2.1


4.1.6 5.5.1


games music sports camera

5.2.1


5.1.1

17 Insert a page break before the paragraph which starts: Cost is a critical factor for many customers.

5.4.1



11.1.1

4

© UCLES 2006 0418/02/O/N/06


20 Using a suitable database package, import the file SCB6MOB.CSV

6.1.1


6.2.1

Make Model Weight Length Width Height Talk time Standby time Display

Nokia 9210 244 158 56 27 600 230 Mono

Nokia 8310 84 97 43 17 135 350 Mono

Nokia 6210 114 130 47 17 270 260 Mono

21


22 Save the data.

11.1.1








8.1.1 8.2.1 9.1.1 9.1.2 9.1.3


11.1.2


• shows only the phones where the Height is less than 22 and the Display is Colour

• shows only the fields Make, Model, Height, Weight

• is sorted into descending order of Make (with Sagem at the top)


• includes the heading Thin colour phones at the top of the page


7.1.1 8.1.1 8.2.1 9.1.1 9.1.2 9.1.3


11.1.2


• where the Make is Philips or Sendo or Alcatel

• sorted into ascending order of Make (with Alcatel at the top)


8.2.1 9.1.1


11.1.3

5




3.1.1

30 Remove the page break inserted in Task B Step 17.

5.4.1


4.1.2

32 Move your name so that it is left aligned in the header of each page.

4.1.3


4.1.4


4.1.5

35 Make all the text (except for the heading) left aligned.

4.1.6


5.5.1

Create a table with 5 rows and 3 columns after the sentence: The table below shows some sample costs from two of the network providers: Enter the following data into this table:

Charges Provider A Provider B

Text 12p per message 5p per message

Mobile to mobile 20p 40p

Answerphone 10p 15p

WAP 10p 6p

37

5.3.1 3.2.1

38 Import a graphic image showing a mobile phone (from clip art, scanner, digital camera or elsewhere), and place this in the top right corner of page 1.

10.1.1




• it appears below the title.

• It is in line with the right margin

• It is in line with the top of the text


3.3.2

6



© UCLES 2006 0418/02/O/N/06


Insert this data as a table after the paragraph which ends: identify up to three manufacturers like these and promote their products: Make sure there is one blank line above and below the table.

10.1.1






Ensure that there are no blank pages.

5.4.1


11.1.1





2 hours 45 minutes



Make sure that your Centre number, candidate number and name are clearly visible on each printout, before it is sent to the printer.






IB06 06_0418_03/6RP © UCLES 2006

[Turn over


2

© UCLES 2006 0418/03/M/J/06

DATA ANALYSIS You work for a gym equipment company called Gymnastic. Your manager has asked you to calculate the current stock position for stock items. All currency values should be in dollars with the $ sign visible. � 1 Create a data model which looks like this:

12.1.1

Information Table

Mark-up 0.05

0.07

Number of stock items

Small

Large

Date Item Size Purchase Increase Sale

24/03/2006 Basic exercise bike

30/03/2006 Cross trainer

06/04/2006 Multi gym

15/04/2006 Treadmill

19/05/2006 Rowing machine

20/05/2006 Trampoline

26/05/2006 Benches

02/06/2006 Punch bags

02/06/2006 Weights

07/06/2006 Elliptical cross trainers

17/06/2006 Step trainer

22/06/2006 Press


Date Date of item in stock (shown above in dd/mm/yyyy format, you may use mm/dd/yyyy if you prefer)

Item The type of gym equipment Size Whether a large item or a small item Purchase The price paid for each item Increase The value added to each item based on the


Sale The price each item is sold at including the Increase

Information Table Mark-up The percentage increase added to all items Number of stock items Count of the number of items.

3


� 2 In the Information Table name the cell that holds the data 0.05 five

Name the cell that holds the data 0.07 seven


12.1.5

6 In the Information Table use COUNTIF to count the number of items where the Size is Small. Place the result in the cell to the right of the heading Small.

In the Information Table use COUNTIF to count the number of items where the Size is Large. Place the result in the cell to the right of the heading Large.

12.1.4

7 Format the cells in the Date column to give the month in word format, (for example: May 19, 2006 or 19 May 2006).

14.1.1

8 Format the cells in the Purchase, Increase, and Sale columns to display the $ sign (dollar) with 2 decimal places.

14.1.1

9 Copy down all formulae entered in steps 3 and 4 so that 12 rows of data can be entered.

12.1.1


14.3.1


15.1.1 14.2.1

3 In the main table in the cell under Increase, enter a formula using IF. This formula calculates the mark-up on the first item.

If the Purchase is greater than or equal to 300 then multiply the Purchase by the named cell seven to calculate the Increase

If the Purchase is less than 300 then multiply the Purchase by the named cell five to calculate the Increase

12.1.4

4 In the main table in the cell under Sale enter a formula which adds the Increase to the Purchase

12.1.3

5 In the Information Table format the cells containing the data 0.05 and 0.07 to display the % value with 0 decimal places (for example 5%).

14.1.1

4

© UCLES 2006 0418/03/M/J/06


12.1.2 12.2.1

Date Item Size Purchase

March 24, 2006 Basic exercise bike Small 94

March 30, 2006 Cross trainer Large 295

April 6, 2006 Multi gym Large 449

April 15, 2006 Treadmill Large 839

May 19, 2006 Rowing machine Small 519

May 20, 2006 Trampoline Large 349

May 26, 2006 Benches Small 139

June 2, 2006 Punch bags Small 258

June 2, 2006 Weights Small 79

June 7, 2006 Elliptical cross trainers Large 444

June 17, 2006 Step trainer Small 45

June 22, 2006 Press Small 88



15.1.1 14.2.1

14 Produce a printout showing only the rows where the Size is Large

13.1.1 15.1.1

15 Produce a printout from all the data showing only the rows where the Date is after 1 June 2006 and the Purchase is greater than 150

13.1.1 15.1.1

5

© UCLES 2006 5197/B/01/06 [Turn Over

WEBSITE AUTHORING

Your manager has asked you to prepare web pages for a gym equipment company called Gymnastic. These pages will give information about the company’s products.

� 1 Download the following files from

http://www.hothouse-design.co.uk/2006webb to your own work area:

SWAD6INT.HTM SWAD6GYM.HTM SWAD6MEN.HTM SWAD6GYM.JPG SWAD6ICO.JPG SWAD6ROW.JPG

16.1.1 16.2.1

2 Using a suitable software package, prepare the following styles for use within all pages on this website:

• h1 – dark green, sans-serif font (e.g. Arial), largest (e.g. 45 point), bold, centered

• h2 – light green, serif (e.g. Times New Roman), bold, smaller (e.g. 18 point), left aligned

• h3 – light green, sans-serif (e.g. Arial), smallest (e.g. 14 point), left aligned


17.1.1 17.1.2 17.1.3

3 Make sure that the stylesheet will work in any browser. Print a copy of the stylesheet that has to be attached to each page as html source code.

Make sure that your name is printed on this page.

21.1.1

4 Using a suitable software package, create a new homepage SWAD6HM.HTM This page will have menu options across the top and a table below the menu. It should look like this:

18.1.1

5 Enter the heading GYMNASTIC Set the text to style h1.

17.1.4

6 Place the contents of SWAD6MEN.HTM below the heading GYMNASTIC to create the menu. This table must have no visible borders. Set the text to style h2.

18.1.2 17.1.4

7 Create a hyperlink for the menu item Rowing Machine to point to the file SWAD6GYM.HTM which should open in a new window called EXTERNAL


18.2.1 18.2.2

6

© UCLES 2006 0418/03/M/J/06

� 8 Below the menu table, create a new table which has 5 rows and 2

columns.

19.1.1

9 Merge the cells to create the table as shown below.

19.1.3

A B

C D

E

F

G


19.1.2

11 Using the contents of the file SWAD6INT.HTM

• place the text What we do into cell A and format this as style h2

• place the text Our company sells…retail prices. into cell B and format this as style h3

• place the text We keep the…is on-line. into cell C and format this as style h3

• place the text You can contact… different media. into cell D and format this as style h3

• place the text Through our… on this website. into cell E and format this as style h3

• place the text In all cases… of our services. into cell G and format this as style h2.

17.1.4

12 Import the image SWAD6GYM.JPG and place it in cell F. Set the width to 500 pixels and maintain the aspect ratio. Make sure that the whole image is visible. Centre align the image.

20.1.1 20.1.2 20.2.1

13 Make sure that you have attached the stylesheet to this page and save the page as SWAD6HM.HTM Make sure your name is displayed on each page. Print this page as it is viewed in your browser. Print a copy of the HTML source.

17.1.4 21.1.1

14 Open the file SWAD6ICO.JPG in a suitable application. Change its size to 35 pixels wide and maintain the aspect ratio. Ensure that the colour depth is 256 colours (8 bit colour) and save the file as SWAD6ICO.GIF

20.2.1 20.2.2

15 Open the file SWAD6GYM.HTM Import the image SWAD6ROW.JPG into the right cell of the table. Resize the image SWAD6ROW.JPG to 300 pixels wide and maintain the aspect ratio.

20.1.1 20.1.2 20.2.1 20.2.2

7

© UCLES 2006 5197/B/01/06 [Turn Over

� 16 Replace the text click here (at the bottom of the page) with the image

SWAD6ICO.GIF Make this a link (in the same window) to the file SWAD6HM.HTM

18.2.1 18.2.2 20.1.1

17 Make sure that you have attached the stylesheet to this page. Save the page as SWAD6GYM.HTM Make sure your name is displayed on each page. Print this page as it is viewed in your browser. Print a copy of the HTML source.

17.1.4 21.1.1

8

© UCLES 2006 0418/03/M/J/06

PRESENTATION AUTHORING Your manager has asked you to set up a presentation for an educational organisation, for students who study business and academic subjects, called The College. The medium for delivery will be a multimedia projector. Presenter notes need to be developed with the slides. � 1 Set up a new presentation consisting of 3 slides. The slide master must have a

light green background and your name and today’s date in small black text placed in the top left corner. It must also contain clipart as a logo placed in the top right corner. The logo must be resized so that it does not overlay any slide text.

22.1.1 22.3.1



Dark blue, right aligned, large font (between 50 and 68 point)

Bright blue, centred, medium font (between 36 and 48 point)

Dark green, left aligned, small font (between 16 and 34 point) Use a bullet of your choice.

22.1.1

On the first slide:

3 Enter the heading The College

22.2.1

4 Enter the subheading Student enrolments below the heading.

22.2.1

5 Add the following presenter notes to this slide: Introduce yourself and your role within the college.

22.2.1

9

© UCLES 2006 5197/B/01/06 [Turn Over


� 6 Enter the heading Department enrolments 2006 in the same style as the first

slide.

22.2.1


� Business/IT � Catering � Art & Design � Science � Technology

22.2.1

8 Produce a vertical bar chart from the following data: Place this chart on the right side of the slide. Make sure that you include a legend showing the subjects.

22.3.2

Product $

Business/IT 350

Catering 275

Art & Design 196

Science 371

Technology 215

9 Draw a thick dark blue vertical line between the graph and the text with an arrow

on both ends.

22.3.3


23.2.1


We have a wide variety of courses on offer. Call in and speak to our enrolment department.

22.2.1

10



© UCLES 2006 0418/03/M/J/06

On the third slide: � 12 Enter the heading Student activities in the same style as the first slide.

22.2.1

13 Enter the following list on the left side of the slide:

� Keep fit � Basketball � Football � Gymnasium � Reading club

22.2.1

14 Place a further clipart image showing sports e.g. football, on this page to the right of the bullets.

22.3.1

Add the following presenter notes to this slide:

The college offers many extra curricular activities.

Why not call in and discuss your needs?

22.2.1


23.1.1


23.2.1


24.1.1

(Please note – your tutor will need to assess the transitions and animations before sending in your work.) After the examination time On your html printout highlight those portions of the code which show that: The external stylesheet is attached to each webpage The table borders are set to 0 and 4 points

SWAD6GYM.JPG is resized to 500 pixels wide SWAD6GYM.JPG is centre aligned The hyperlink from Rowing Machine opens SWAD6GYM.HTM in a new window called EXTERNAL SWAD6ROW.JPG is resized to 300 pixels wide SWAD6ICO.JPG has been changed to .gif format SWAD6ICO.GIF is resized to 35 pixels SWAD6ICO.GIF hyperlinks to SWAD6HM.HTM





2 hours 45 minutes









IB06 11_0418_03/8RP © UCLES 2006

[Turn over


2

© UCLES 2006 0418/03/O/N/06

DATA ANALYSIS You work for a electrical goods retail company called Dygitell. Your manager has asked you to calculate the current stock position for stock items. All currency values should be in dollars with the $ sign visible. � 1 Create a data model which looks like this:

12.1.1

Information Table

Manager's Discount M .06

Clearance Discount C .03

Number of sales

Kitchen

Household

Date Product Offer Type Price Discount Value

15/02/06

24/03/06

09/04/06

27/04/06

30/05/06

08/06/06

21/07/06

21/07/06

26/07/06

01/08/06

14/08/06

25/08/06


Date Date of product in stock (shown above in dd/mm/yyyy format, you may use mm/dd/yyyy if you prefer)

Product The type of product Offer The type of discount to be applied to the

product Type The type of product on sale Price The price of the product before discount Discount The value is taken away from the Price based

on the Offer. If the Offer is M, then the discount is 6%. If the Offer is C then the discount is 3%.

Value The price each item is sold at, after taking off the discount

Information Table Manager’s Discount The percentage discount to be taken away

from the product if the Offer equals M Clearance Discount The percentage discount to be taken away

from the product if the Offer equals C Number of sales Count of the number of items.

3


� 2 In the Information Table name the cell that holds the data 0.06 six

Name the cell that holds the data 0.03 three

These named cells will be used to calculate the Discount

12.1.5

6 In the Information Table use COUNTIF to count the number of products where the Type is Kitchen. Place the result in the cell to the right of the heading Kitchen.

In the Information Table use COUNTIF to count the number of products where the Type is Household. Place the result in the cell to the right of the heading Household.

12.1.4

7 Format the cells in the Date column to give the month in word format, (for example February 02, 2006 or 02.Feb 2006).

14.1.1

8 Format the cells in the Price, Discount, and Value columns to display the $ sign (dollar) with 2 decimal places.

14.1.1

9 Copy down all formulae entered in steps 3 and 4 so that 12 rows of data can be entered.

12.1.1


14.3.1


15.1.1 14.2.1

3 In the main table in the cell under Discount, enter a formula using IF. This formula calculates the discount on the first item.

If the Offer equals M then multiply the Price by the named cell six to calculate the Discount

If the Offer equals C then multiply the Price by the named cell three to calculate the Discount

12.1.4

4 In the main table in the cell under Value enter a formula which takes away the Discount from the Price

12.1.3

5 In the Information Table format the cells containing the data 0.06 and 0.03 to display the % value with 0 decimal places (for example 6%).

14.1.1

4

© UCLES 2006 0418/03/O/N/06


12.1.2 12.2.1

Date Product Offer Type Price

15-Feb-2006 Washer M Kitchen 350

24-Mar-2006 Iron M Kitchen 25

9-Apr-2006 Television C Household 1050

27-Apr-2006 Dryer C Kitchen 150

30-May-2006 Kettle C Kitchen 15

8-Jun-2006 Radio C Household 34

21-Jul-2006 Washer M Kitchen 550

21-Jul-2006 Oven M Kitchen 650

26-Jul-2006 Washer C Kitchen 421

1-Aug-2006 Television C Household 624

14-Aug-2006 Radio C Household 28.50

25-Aug-2006 Television M Household 624



15.1.1 14.2.1

14 Produce a printout from all the data showing only the rows where the Type is Kitchen

13.1.1 15.1.1

15 Produce a printout from all the data showing only the rows where the Date is before 1 July 2006 and the Value is less than 30

13.1.1 15.1.1

5


WEBSITE AUTHORING Your manager has asked you to prepare web pages for an educational organisation called The College. These pages will give information about the college and its courses. � 16 Download the following files from

http://www.hothouse-design.co.uk/2006weba to your own work area: SWAA6FLX.HTM SWAA6INT.HTM SWAA6MEN.TXT SWAA6HOMJPG SWAA6ICO.JPG SWAA6FLX.JPG

16.1.1 16.2.1


• H1 – black, serif font (e.g. Times New Roman), largest (e.g. 45 point), bold, centred

• H2 – bright blue, sans-serif (e.g. Arial), bold, italic, smaller (e.g. 18 point), left aligned

• H3 – dark blue, sans-serif (e.g. Arial), smallest (e.g. 14 point), left aligned

Save the stylesheet and attach it to each web page as you create it. Make sure the stylesheet will work in any web browser

17.1.1 17.1.2 17.1.3

18 Print a copy of the stylesheet that is to be attached to each page as html source code. Make sure your name is printed on this printout.

21.1

19 Using a suitable software package, create a new homepage COLHOME.HTM This page will have a heading at the top, menu options on the left and a text/graphics area on the right. It should look like this:

18.1.1

20 Enter the heading THE COLLEGE as style H1.

17.1.4

21 Place the contents of SWAA6MEN.TXT down the left side of the page to create the menu options in style H2.

18.1.2 17.1.4

22 Create a hyperlink for the item Flexible learning to point to the file SWAA6FLX.HTM which should open in a new window called EXTERNAL Note that the web page which you have linked to is not yet complete.

18.2.1 18.2.2

6

© UCLES 2006 0418/03/O/N/06

� 23 In the text/graphics area on the right, create a table which has 6 rows and

2 columns,

19.1.1

A

B C

D E

F G

H I

J K

24 Merge the top two cells of the table as shown A.

19.1.3

25 Set a 6 point border for the table.

19.1.2

26 Use the contents of the file SWAA6INT.HTM:

• place the heading Business/IT into cell B and format this as style H2

• place the text which starts the courses offered here are: Administration...into cell C and format this as style H3

• place the heading Catering into cell D and format this as style H2

• place the text which starts The courses offered here are: Accommodation …into cell E and format this as style H3

• place the heading Art & Design into cell F and format this as style H2

• place the text which starts The courses offered here are: Art & Design…into cell G and format this as style H3

• place the heading Science into cell H and format this as style H2

• place the text which starts The courses offered here are: Animal Care…into cell I and format this as style H3

• place the heading Technology into cell J and format this as style H2

• place the text which starts The courses offered here are: Brickwork…into cell K and format this as style H3

17.1.4

27 Import the image SWAA6HOM.JPG and place it in the merged cell A. Set the height to 150 pixels. Do not maintain the aspect ratio. Make sure that the whole image is visible.

20.1.1 20.1.2 20.2.1

28 Make sure that you have attached the stylesheet to this page and save it as COLHOME.HTM


17.1.4 21.1.1


20.2.1 20.2.2

30 Open the file SWAA6FLX.HTM Import the image SWAA6FLX.JPG to the right cell of the table. Place this image to the right of the text.

20.1.1 20.1.2

7


� 31 Replace the text click here (at the bottom of the page) with the image

SWAA6ICO.GIF Make this a link (in the same window) to the file COLHOME.HTM

18.2.1 18.2.2 20.1.1

32 Make sure that you have attached the stylesheet to this page and save it as SWAA6FLX.HTM Print this page as it is viewed in your browser. Print a copy of the HTML source.

17.1.4 21.1.1

8

© UCLES 2006 0418/03/O/N/06

PRESENTATION AUTHORING Your manager has asked you to set up a presentation for an electrical goods company called Electry. The medium for delivery will be a multimedia projector. Presenter notes need to be produced with the slides.

�

33 Set up a new presentation consisting of 3 slides. The slide master must have a very light green background and your name and today’s date in small black font placed in the top right corner. It must also contain clipart of an item of electrical equipment for the kitchen as a logo placed in the bottom right corner.



22.1.1 22.3.1



Dark green, right aligned, large font (between 50 and 72 point)

Bright green, centre aligned, medium font (between 36 and 46 point)

Bright green, left aligned, small font (between 16 and 32 point). Use a bullet of your choice.

22.1.1

On the first slide:

35 Enter the heading Electry 22.2.1

36 Enter the subheading Suppliers of quality white goods below the heading.

22.2.1


22.2.1

9



� 38 Enter the heading Price of larger white goods in the same style as the

first slide. 22.2.1

39 Enter the following bulleted list on the right side of the slide.

� Freezer � Fridge � Fridge/Freezer � Oven � Tumble Dryer � Washing Machine

22.2.1

40 Create a pie chart from the following data: 22.3.2

Place the chart on the left side of the slide. Make sure that you include a legend.

Each slice must show the currency value in $ (dollars) to 0 decimal places.

41 Add a thick dark green vertical line between the bulleted list and the

chart. 22.3.3



Our range of white goods excels. Visit our website www.electry.com

22.2.1

White goods $

Freezer 127.99

Fridge 205.99

Fridge/Freezer 498.99

Oven 589.99

Tumble Dryer 185.99

Washing Machine 404.99

10



© UCLES 2006 0418/03/O/N/06

On the third slide: � 44 Enter the heading Our warranty in the same style as the first slide.

22.2.1


� 20 days return if not completely satisfied � Free delivery within a radius of 20 miles � Free removal of old goods on delivery of new

22.2.1

46 Place a different clipart image showing an item of electrical equipment for a kitchen. Place this to the right of the bulleted list.

22.3.1


Outside a radius of 20 miles we only charge a small fee, for example $5 per 10 miles.

Visit our showroom or our website and take advantage of our low prices.

22.2.1


23.1.1


23.2.1


24.1.1

(Please note – your tutor will need to assess the transitions and animations before sending in your work.) After the examination time On your html printout highlight those portions of the code which show that: The external stylesheet is attached to each webpage The table borders are set to 6 point SWAA6HOM.JPG is resized to 150 pixels high The hyperlink from Flexible Learning opens SWAA6FLX.HTM in a new window called EXTERNAL SWAA6ICO.JPG has been changed to .gif format SWAA6ICO.GIF is resized to 35 pixels SWAA6ICO.GIF hyperlinks to COLHOME.HTM


IB07 06_0418_02/3RP © UCLES 2007 [Turn over

*1659865406*

UNIVERSITY OF CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS International General Certificate of Secondary Education


Paper 2 Practical Test A May/June 2007

2 hours 30 minutes









2

© UCLES 2007 0418/02/M/J/07

You work for a company called Hothouse Design. You are going to perform some clerical tasks for this company. � 1 Prepare an e-mail message to be sent to [email protected] which contains the

subject line June 2007 The body text of the message should include:

• your name

• your centre number

• your candidate number

• the text: Please send the instructions that I need. Send this message. You should receive the instructions that you need within an e-mail reply.

2 Read the reply to your message and follow the instructions. The URL which you will

need is http://www.hothouse-design.co.uk

3 Prepare an e-mail message:

• to be sent to [email protected]

• copied to [email protected]

• with a blind carbon copy to [email protected]

• with the subject line ICTCOREX The body text of the message should include:

• your name



• the text: Here is the requested file.

4 Attach the file which you downloaded from the Hothouse website to your e-mail.

5 Print a copy of this e-mail, showing clearly that the attachment is present.

Send the e-mail.

3


You are now going to edit a document about the sales of stationery. �

6 Using a suitable software package, load the file J7REVIEW.RTF



9 Set the top and bottom margins to 3 centimetres and the left and right margins to 3

centimetres.

10 Place your candidate number left aligned, your name centre aligned and your

centre number right aligned in the header. Place an automated page number centre aligned in the footer. Ensure that all the alignments match the margin settings. Make sure that headers and footers are displayed on each page.

11 Format the entire document into three columns of equal width, with a 1 centimetre

gap between the columns.

12 Set all the text to a serif font.

13 Set all the text to single line spacing.

14 Make all the text left aligned.

15 Set the font size for all the text to 12 point.

16 Insert a page break before the first paragraph.

17 Format ONLY the first page of the document as a single column.

18 Make this first page a title page by adding the heading 2007 Stationery Sales

Analysis for Hothouse Design

4

© UCLES 2007 0418/02/M/J/07

19 Make the heading centre aligned.

20 Set the font size of the heading to 36 point.

21 Make the heading italic.

22 Add the subheading Edited by and your name, below the heading.

23 Set the text used for the heading and subheading to the same sans-serif font.

24 Set the font size of the subheading to18 point.

25 Make the subheading italic and underlined.

26 Make the subheading right aligned.

27 Move the last paragraph that starts The current sales team consists… so that it

becomes the second paragraph.

28 Change the bulleted list to an automatically lettered list like this:

a) Bettabuy b) University of Tawara Beach c) Dudley d) Papermite e) Dygitell

29 In the stylesheet excerpt, amend the style for heading 1 so that the colour is pure

blue (with no green or red components). Change the hexadecimal code so that this is correct.

30 In the stylesheet excerpt, amend the style for heading 1 so that the font size is 36

point. Change the stylesheet so that this is correct.

31 In the stylesheet excerpt, amend the style for a list so that it is italic. Change the

stylesheet so that this is correct.

5


32 In the stylesheet excerpt, amend the style for a paragraph so that it will accept any generic sans-serif font as well as the specified fonts. Change the stylesheet so that this is correct.

33 Locate the table containing the word Forename in the top left cell.

Insert a new column 1 in this table to the left of the Forename column. Enter the following data into this column:

Code

CP

CS

IS

JK

PO

TB

RT

34 Delete the seventh row from the table (containing Tereza Bartoska).

Delete the second column from the table (containing Forename). Ensure that all of the table is visible with no text wrapping and the table fits within the column.

35 Set all paragraphs (not lists, tables or excerpts) so that the first line of each

paragraph is indented by 1 centimetre.

36 Import a graphic image showing a pen or pencil (from clip art, scanner, digital

camera or elsewhere), and place this at the top of the right column on page 2.


• it is re-sized to fill the column width

• the aspect ratio is maintained

• the text wraps below the image. It may look like this:

6

© UCLES 2007 0418/02/M/J/07

38 Using a suitable database package, import the file J7STOCK.CSV Assign the following data types to the fields. Field name Data type Staff Text Company Text Item Text Unit Numeric / Currency / 2 decimal places Sales Numeric / Integer Delivery Boolean / Logical Use the above field names. You may add another field as a primary key if your software requires this.

39 Save a screen shot showing the field names and data types used. Print a copy of

this screen shot. Make sure that your name, centre number and candidate number are included on this printout.

40 Insert the data for the following four records:

Staff Company Item Unit Sales Delivery

RT Dygitell Biro - Red (box 20) 2.4 2 Y

RT Dygitell Biro - Black (box 20) 2.4 4 N

RT Dygitell Biro - Green (box 20) 2.4 1 Y

RT Dygitell Biro - Blue (box 20) 2.4 2 Y


41 Save the data.



• fits on a single page

• shows only the records where the Company is TryIT or Dygitell

• contains a new field called Cost which is calculated at run-time. This field will calculate Unit price multiplied by Sales

• has the Cost field set as currency with 2 decimal places

• shows only the fields Company, Item, Unit, Sales and Cost

• shows this data and the field names in full

• sorts the data into ascending order of Cost (with 0.57 at the top)

• includes the heading TryIT or Dygitell at the top of the page

• has your name, centre number and candidate number on the right in the footer.


7





• shows only the records where Delivery is yes and the words Biro and Blue appear as part of the Item field

• shows only the fields Company, Item, Staff


• sorts the data into ascending order of Staff (with IS at the top) and then descending order of Company

• includes the heading Blue biros delivered at the top of the page

• has your name, centre number and candidate number on the left in the footer.



• shows a summary of only the Staff and Sales fields

• performs a count of the number of sales made by each member of Staff

• calculates the sum of the Sales for each member of staff.

47 Export this data in a format that can be opened by your graph/charting package.

Save this data in a format which can be imported into a text document.

48 Import this data into your document as a table immediately after the paragraph

which ends: …the count of the number of individual transactions: Make sure there is one blank line above and below the table.

49 You now need to open the data saved at step 47 in an appropriate charting

package.

50 Using a lookup function, replace the initials for each member of Staff with their Full

name using the file J7STAFF.CSV

51 Create a vertical bar chart showing only the staff names and the number of

transactions (count of the rows) for each member of staff.

52 Add a title to the chart Number of transactions per employee

53 Label the category axis Employee and the value axis Number of transactions

Include the staff names (in full) as the category axis labels. Do not include a legend.

8



© UCLES 2007 0418/02/M/J/07

54 Save this chart in a format which can be imported into a text document.

55 Import this chart into your document immediately after the paragraph: The number

of individual transactions per employee can also been seen graphically: Make sure that all labels are fully visible. Make sure there is one blank line above and below the chart. Resize the chart so that it fits exactly into a single column and maintain its aspect ratio (please note that it may not appear in the position shown in the diagram).


Place page breaks, if necessary, to ensure that:

• tables do not overlap two pages or columns

• tables are not split between two pages or columns

• the chart does not overlap two columns

• the list is not split between two pages or columns



• there are no blank pages.




*8771477412*



Paper 2 Practical Test A October/November 2007

2 hours 30 minutes









2

© UCLES 2007 0418/02/O/N/07

You work for a company called Hothouse Design. You are going to perform some clerical tasks for this company. � 1 Prepare an e-mail message to be sent to [email protected] which contains the

subject line November 2007

The body text of the message should include:

• your name



• the text: Please send the instructions that I need.

Send this message. You should receive the instructions that you need within an e-mail reply.






• with the subject line ICTCOREX The body text of the message should include:

• your name



• the text: Here is the requested file.



You are now going to edit a document about the sales of stationery. 6 Using a suitable software package, load the file N7REVIEW.RTF



9 Set the top and bottom margins to 4 centimetres and the left and right margins to 1 centimetre.

10 Place your name left aligned and your candidate number right aligned in the header. Place an automated page number left aligned in the footer and your centre number right aligned in the footer. Ensure that all the alignments match the margin settings. Make sure that headers and footers are displayed on each page.

3


� 11 Format the entire document into two columns of equal width, with a 5 millimetre

gap and a line between the columns.

12 Set all the text to a sans-serif font.

13 Set all the text to 1.5 line spacing.

14 Make all the text fully justified.




18 Make this first page a title page by adding the heading Hothouse Design 2007 Stationery Sales Analysis



21 Make the heading underlined.

22 Add the subheading Edited by and add your name, below the heading.

23 Set the text used for the heading and subheading to the same serif font.

24 Set the font size of the subheading to14 point.

25 Make only the subheading italic.

26 Make the subheading left aligned.

27 Move the last paragraph that starts The current sales team has a mixture… so that it becomes the second paragraph.

28 Change the bulleted list to an automatically numbered list like this:

1. weekly 2. monthly 3. quarterly 4. annually

29 In the style sheet excerpt, amend the style for heading 3 so that the colour is black. Change the hexadecimal code so that this is correct.

30 In the style sheet excerpt, amend the style for a paragraph so that the font size is 11 point. Change the style sheet so that this is correct.

31 In the style sheet excerpt, amend the style for heading 3 so that it is bold. Change the style sheet so that this is correct.

32 In the style sheet excerpt, amend the style for a paragraph so that it will accept any generic sans-serif font as well as the specified fonts. Change the style sheet so that this is correct.

4

© UCLES 2007 0418/02/O/N/07

� 33 Locate the table containing the word Surname in the top left cell.

Insert a new column 1 in this table to the left of the Surname column. Enter the following data into this column:

Years

15

27

11/12

2

6/12

5/12

1/12

1 week

34 Delete the sixth row from the table (containing O’Keefe).

Delete the third column from the table (containing Forename). Ensure that all of the table is visible with no text wrapping and the table fits within the column.

35 Import a graphic image showing a pen or pencil (from clip art, scanner, digital camera or elsewhere), and place this at the top of the left column on page 3.




• the text wraps below the image. It may look like this:

5


� 37 Using a suitable database package, import the file N7STOCK.CSV

Assign the following data types to the fields. Field name Data type Staff Text Company Text Item Text Unit Numeric / Currency / 2 decimal places Sales Numeric / Integer Delivery Boolean / Logical Ensure that you use these field names. You may add another field as a primary key if your software requires this.

38 Save a screen shot showing the field names and data types used. Print a copy of this screen shot. Make sure that your name, centre number and candidate number are included on this printout.


Staff Company Item Unit Sales Delivery

CS Patel Bostik Blu-Tack Economy Size 1.84 2 N

CS Patel Biro - Red (box 20) 2.4 1 N

CS Patel Ruler 0.14 10 N


40 Save the data.




• shows only the records where the Company is Patel or Dudley or Simplex

• contains a new field called Cost which is calculated at run-time. This field will calculate Unit price multiplied by Sales

• has the Cost field set as Currency with 2 decimal places

• shows only the fields Company, Item, Unit, Sales and Cost


• sorts the data into ascending order of Cost (with 0.57 at the top)

• includes the heading Patel or Dudley or Simplex at the top of the page

• has your name, candidate number and centre number on the right in the footer.


6

© UCLES 2007 0418/02/O/N/07

� 43 Produce a report which:



• shows only the records where Delivery is Yes and the words A4 and File appear as part of the Item field

• shows only the fields Company, Item, Staff


• sorts the data into ascending order of Staff (with IS at the top) and then descending order of Company

• includes the heading A4 files delivered at the top of the page

• has your name, centre number and candidate number on the left in the footer.



• shows a summary of only the Staff and Sales fields

• performs a count of the number of sales made by each member of Staff

• calculates the sum of the Sales for each member of staff.

46 Export this data in a format that can be opened by your graph/charting package. Save this data in a format which can be imported into a text document.

47 Import this data into your document as a table immediately after the paragraph which ends: …the number of individual transactions in a single day’s trading: Make sure there is one blank line above and below the table.

48 You now need to open the data saved at step 46 in an appropriate charting package.

49 Using a lookup function replace the initials for each member of Staff with their Full name using the file N7STAFF.CSV

50 Create a vertical bar chart showing only the staff names and the number of transactions (counting the rows) for each member of staff.

51 Add a title to the chart Transactions per employee

52 Label the category axis Employee and the value axis Number of transactions Include the staff names in full as the category axis labels. Do not include a legend.


7



0418/02/O/N/07

� 54 Import this chart into your document immediately after the paragraph: The number

of individual transactions per employee can also been seen graphically: Make sure that all labels are fully visible. Make sure there is one blank line above and below the chart. Resize the chart so that it fits exactly into a single column and maintain its aspect ratio (please note that it may not appear in the position shown in the diagram).


Place breaks, if necessary, to ensure that:

• tables do not overlap two pages or columns










*0030068772**0030068772*



Paper 3 Practical Test B May/June 2007

2 hours 30 minutes






Before each printout you should proof-read the document to make sure that you have followed all instructions correctly.



2

© UCLES 2007 0418/03/M/J/07

You work for a company called Hothouse Design. You are going to perform some clerical tasks for this company. All currency values should be in UK pounds (sterling) with the £ sign visible. � 1 Using a suitable software package, load the file J7STOCK2.CSV

2 In the Company column use a lookup function to show the company name. Use the

CCode column for the lookup value and the file J7CODE.CSV for the array. Make sure that you use both absolute and relative referencing within your function. Replicate this function so that the company name for each item is shown.

3 Enter the following data into the model.

Dcode Rate

A 0.225

B 0.18

C 0.1

4 Name the cell containing 0.225 RateA

Name the cell containing 0.18 RateB Name the cell containing 0.1 RateC

5 Format these three cells as percentage values to 0 decimal places.

6 Use a Countif function (that includes both absolute and relative referencing) in cell

B2, to count the number of SX entries in the CCode column. Do not count any entries in rows 1 to 4. Replicate this function into cell B3 to count the number of BE entries and into cell B4 to count the number of UTB entries.

7 In the Cost column (Cell G7) use a formula to multiply Unit by Quantity

Replicate this function so that the Cost price is shown for each item.

3


� 8 In the Discount column (Cell H7) use an IF function to calculate the discount to be

given. If the Code is A then multiply the named cell RateA by Cost If the Code is B then multiply the named cell RateB by Cost If the Code is C then multiply the named cell RateC by Cost Replicate this formula so that the discount is shown for each item.

9 In the Price column (Cell I7) use a formula to subtract the Discount from the Cost

Replicate this formula so that the price is shown for each item.

10 Format only the Unit, Cost, Discount and Price columns as currency in pounds

sterling to 2 decimal places.


12 Save the data model and print a copy of the sheet showing the formulae used.

Make sure that the contents of all cells are visible and that the printout fits on a single page wide and two (or three) pages tall. Make sure that your name, candidate number and centre number are printed in the header of each page.


14 Save the data model and print a copy of the sheet showing the values. Make sure

that the contents of all cells are visible and that the printout fits on a single page wide and two (or three) pages tall. Make sure that your name, candidate number and centre number are printed in the header of each page.

15 Hide rows 1 to 5 inclusive.

Hide columns A, C, E, G and H.

16 Search the data to find all the items where the Price is less than £1

Print this data. Make sure that your name, candidate number and centre number are printed in the header of the page.

4

© UCLES 2007 0418/03/M/J/07

� 17 Select all the data.

Leave the rows 1 to 5 inclusive and columns A, C, E, G and H hidden. Search this data to find all the items where Quantity is greater than or equal to 60 and Price is greater than £2 Print this data. Make sure that your name, candidate number and centre number are printed in the header of the page.

You are going to create and edit some web pages for this company. 18 Download the following files from http://www.hothouse-design.co.uk/2007_June

to your own work area: J7PAGE.TXT J7MENU.HTM J7OFFER.HTM J7SUPPLY.JPG J7LOGO.JPG J7SUPP1.JPG J7SALES.CSV

19 Using a suitable software package, prepare the following styles for use within all

pages of this website:

• h1 – dark blue, sans-serif font, 24 point, centre aligned, bold

• h2 – dark blue, sans-serif font, 18 point, centre aligned

• h3 – blue, sans-serif font, 12 point, right aligned

• h4 – blue, sans-serif font, 12 point, centre aligned

• li – black, serif font, 10 point, bullet points, left aligned, italic

• p – blue, serif font, 10 point, left aligned.

Save the style sheet and attach it to each web page as you create it. Make sure the style sheet that you prepare will work in any web browser.

20 Print a copy of the style sheet in css format. Make sure that your name, centre

number and candidate number are printed on this page.

21 Using a suitable software package, create a new homepage HOMEPAGE.HTM

This page will have your name, a heading and menu options across the top. It will have a table below the menu. It should look like this:

5


� 22 Attach the external style sheet that you saved in step 19.

Ensure (by removing code if necessary) that, if you are using a WYSIWYG package, the styles from the style sheet are not overridden by the package.

23 In the top right corner add the text Last edited by and add your name, centre

number and candidate number. Set the text to style h3.

24 Enter the heading Hothouse Design

Set the text to style h1.

25 Place the contents of J7MENU.HTM as a table below the heading to create the

menu. Apply the style h4 to all the text within this table.

26 Set the table border to 3

27 Set the cell padding and the cell spacing for the table to 4 and the width of the table

to 100%

28 Below the menu, create a new table which has 4 rows and 2 columns.


A

B

C

D

E

30 Set the cell padding for the table to 4, the cell spacing for the table to 4 and the

width of the table to 100%

31 Set the table border of this table to 1

6

© UCLES 2007 0418/03/M/J/07

� 32 Using the contents of the file J7PAGE.TXT place:

• the text Hothouse Design can provide… high quality products. into cell A and format this as style h2

• the text We offer a… and much more. into cell B and format this as follows: We offer a range of products including: as style p stationery as style li computer hardware as style li computer software as style li computer consumables as style li and much more. as style p

• the text You can contact us in many ways. into cell C and format this as style h2

• the text Through our website… of our services. into cell E and format this as style h3.

33 Import the image J7SUPPLY.JPG and place it in cell D.

Set the width of the image to 300 pixels and maintain the aspect ratio. Make sure that the whole image is visible.

34 Create a hyperlink for the menu item Special offers to point to the file

J7OFFER.HTM which should open in a new window called _external Note that the web page which you have linked to is not yet complete.

35 Save the page as HOMEPAGE.HTM


36 Open the file J7LOGO.JPG in a suitable application. Change its width to 50 pixels

and its height to 53 pixels. Ensure that the colour depth is 256 colours (8 bit colour) and save the file as J7LOGO.GIF

37 Open the file J7OFFER.HTM

Import the image J7SUPP1.JPG into the right cell of the table. Resize the image J7SUPP1.JPG to 250 pixels wide and maintain the aspect ratio.

38 Replace the text Candidate name (at the top of the page) with your name,

candidate number and centre number.

7


� 39 Replace the text click here (at the bottom of the page) with the image J7LOGO.GIF

Make this a link in the same window to HOMEPAGE.HTM

40 Attach the external style sheet that you saved in step 19.


41 Save the page as J7OFFER.HTM


8

© UCLES 2007 0418/03/M/J/07

You are going to create and edit a presentation for this company. The medium for delivery will be a multimedia projector. You will need to produce presenter notes and audience notes with the slides. � 42 Set up a new presentation consisting of 3 slides.

On the master slide: 43 The slide master must have a cream (or light yellow) background and your Centre

number, candidate number and name in a small black font placed in the bottom left corner. It must also contain a clipart image of a pen or pencil as a logo placed in the top right corner. The logo must be resized so that no text or other object overlaps it. Include the slide number in the bottom right of the footer.

44 Set the following styles of text throughout the entire presentation:

Heading: Dark blue, right aligned, large font (48 point) Subheading: Blue (bright blue), right aligned, medium font (32 point) Bulleted list: Black, left aligned, small font (24 point). Use a bullet of your choice

On the first slide: 45 Enter the heading Hothouse Design

46 Enter the subheading Providing all your stationery and ICT needs for now and

the future… below the heading.


Hothouse Design have now added ICT to their portfolio.

On the second slide: 48 Enter the heading Range of products: in the same style as the first slide.

49 Add a black horizontal line, 3 points thick, below the heading.

9


� 50 Enter the following bulleted list on the left side of the slide, below the line.

• stationery

• computer hardware

• computer software

• computer consumables

51 Enter the text and much more... below the bulleted list on the left side of the slide

as a subheading.

52 Place the image J7SUPP1.JPG so that it fills most of the right half of the slide.

Make sure that it does not overlap or cover anything placed on the master slide.

53 The bulleted list should have each bullet set to appear one at a time using the

same animation effect. No other elements on the slide should be animated.

54 Add the following presenter notes to this slide: We have a wide variety of

products, ranging from pens and pencils to state of the art computers.

On the third slide: 55 Enter the heading Best sellers in the same style as the first slide.


• pens

• pencils

• rulers

57 Using a suitable software package, load the file J7SALES.CSV

Create a bar chart from this file using only the Product and Sold data. Do not include a legend. Add the label Products to the category axis and Number Sold to the value axis. Make sure that all of the Product names are visible. Place this bar chart on the right side of the slide.


We will never be surpassed for quality of products or service.

10



© UCLES 2007 0418/03/M/J/07

For the whole presentation: � 59 Use the same transitional effect between each slide.

60 Save the presentation using a new filename. Print the presentation showing all of

the presenter notes.

61 Print the presentation showing audience notes of three slides to a page with space

for the audience to make notes.

62 Print a screen shot of slide 2 showing the animation used for the bulleted lists.

63 Print a screen shot of the presentation showing the transitions between the slides.

After the examination time – on the html printouts of your webpage On your printout highlight those portions of the code which show that:

• your name, centre number and candidate number are present

• the external style sheet is attached to each webpage

• the table borders are set to 3 and 1 point

• the table widths are set to 100%

• the cell spacing and cell padding are both set to 4

• J7SUPPLY.JPG is resized to 300 pixels wide

• J7SUPP1.JPG is resized to 250 pixels wide

• the hyperlink from Special offers opens J7OFFER.HTM in a new window called _external

• J7LOGO.JPG has been changed to .gif format

• J7LOGO.GIF is resized to 50 pixels wide and 53 pixels high

• J7LOGO.GIF hyperlinks to HOMEPAGE.HTM



*0810124082**0810124082*



Paper 3 Practical Test B October/November 2007

2 hours 30 minutes






Before each printout you should proof-read the document to make sure that you have followed all instructions correctly.



2

© UCLES 2007 0418/03/O/N/07

You work for a company called Hothouse Design. You are going to perform some clerical tasks for this company. All currency values should be in UK pounds (sterling) with the £ sign visible. � 1 Using a suitable software package, load the file N7STOCK2.CSV

2 In the Unit Cost column use a lookup function to show the unit cost. Use the Code

column for the lookup value and the file N7CODE.CSV for the array. Make sure you use both absolute and relative referencing within your function. Replicate this function so that the Unit Cost is shown for each row.

3 Enter the following data into the model.

Dcode Rate

A 0.045

B 0.09

C 0.125

4 Name the cell containing 0.045 RateA

Name the cell containing 0.09 RateB Name the cell containing 0.125 RateC

5 Format these three cells as percentage values to 0 decimal places.

6 Use a Countif function (that includes both absolute and relative referencing) in cell

H2, to count the number of Cartridge entries in the Type column. Replicate this formula into cell H3 to count the number of Paper entries and into cell H4 to count the number of Storage entries.

7 In the Cost column (Cell G7) use a formula to multiply Unit Cost by Sales

Replicate this formula so that the Cost price is shown for each item.

3


� 8 In the Discount column (Cell H7) use an IF function to calculate the discount to be

given. If Sales are greater than or equal to 10 then multiply the named cell RateA by Cost If Sales are greater than or equal to 20 then multiply the named cell RateB by Cost If Sales are greater than or equal to 30 then multiply the named cell RateC by Cost Replicate this function so that the Discount is shown for each item.

9 In the Price column (Cell I7) use a formula to subtract the Discount from the Cost

Replicate this formula so that the Discount is shown for each item.

10 Format only the Unit Cost, Cost, Discount and Price columns as currency in pounds

sterling to 2 decimal places.



Make sure that the contents of all cells are visible. Make sure that your name, candidate number and centre number are printed in the header of each page.


14 Save the data model and print a copy of the sheet showing the values. Make sure

that the contents of all cells are visible. Make sure that your name, candidate number and centre number are printed in the header of each page.


Hide columns A, D, F, G and H.

4

© UCLES 2007 0418/03/O/N/07

� 16 Search the data to find all the items where the Supplier is Maxell

Print this data. Make sure that your name, candidate number and centre number are printed in the header of the page.

17 Select all of the data.

Leave the rows 1 to 5 inclusive and columns A, D, F, G and H hidden. Search this data to find all the items where Sales are greater than or equal to 20 and Price is less than £100 Print this data. Make sure that your name, candidate number and centre number are printed in the header of the page.

You are going to create and edit some web pages for this company. 18 Download the following files from

http://www.hothouse-design.co.uk/2007_November to your own work area: N7PAGE.TXT N7MENU.HTM N7OFFERS.HTM N7CART.JPG N7ICON.JPG N7MEDIA.JPG N7PRINT.JPG N7SALES.CSV

19 Using a suitable software package, prepare the following styles for use within all

pages of this website:

• h1 – black, serif font, 36 point, centre aligned

• h2 – black, serif font, 18 point, centre aligned

• h3 – red, sans-serif font, 12 point, centre aligned, bold

• h4 – red, sans-serif font, 12 point, left aligned

• li – red, sans-serif font, 10 point, bullet points, left aligned

• p – dark red (or maroon), sans-serif font, 10 point, left aligned Save the style sheet and attach it to each web page as you create it. Make sure the style sheet that you prepare will work in any web browser.

20 Print a copy of the style sheet in css format. Make sure that your name, centre

number and candidate number are printed on this page.

5


� 21 Using a suitable software package, create a new homepage HOMEPAGE.HTM

This page will contain your name, a heading, a table and have menu options across the bottom. It should look like this:


Ensure (by removing code if necessary) that, if you are using a WYSIWYG package, the styles are not overridden by the package.

23 In the top left corner add the text Last edited by and add your name, centre

number and candidate number. Set the text to style h4.

24 Enter the heading Peripherals and Consumables


25 Below the heading, create a table which has 4 rows and 2 columns.


A

B

C

D

E

27 Set the cell padding for the table to 10, the cell spacing for the table to 2 and the

width of the table to 100%


6

© UCLES 2007 0418/03/O/N/07

� 29 Using the contents of the file N7PAGE.TXT place:

• the text We stock a wide…accessories and consumables. into cell A and format this as style h2

• the text Peripherals include…CDs and DVDs. into cell B and format this as follows:

Peripherals include as style p printers as style li scanners as style li network and WIFI, as style li and consumables like: as style p cartridges as style li specialist paper as style li Blank CDs and DVDs. as style li

• the text You can contact us in many ways. into cell C and format this as style h3

• the text Through our website…of our services. into cell E and format this as style h4.

30 Import the image N7CART.JPG and place it in cell D.

Set the height of the image to 200 pixels and maintain the aspect ratio. Make sure that the whole image is visible.

31 Place the contents of N7MENU.HTM as a table below the existing table to create

the menu. Apply the style h2 to all the text within this table.

32 Set the cell padding for the table to 10 and the cell spacing for the table to 2

Set the table width to 600 pixels.

33 Set the border size of this table to 2

34 Create a hyperlink for the menu item Special Offers to point to the file

N7OFFERS.HTM which should open in a new window called _external Note that the web page which you have linked to is not yet complete.

35 Save the page as HOMEPAGE.HTM


7


� 36 Open the file N7ICON.JPG in a suitable application. Change its width to 40 pixels

and its height to 42 pixels. Ensure that the colour depth is 256 colours (8 bit colour) and save the file as N7ICON.GIF

37 Open the file N7OFFERS.HTM

Import the image N7MEDIA.JPG into the right cell of the table. Resize the image N7MEDIA.JPG to 300 pixels wide and maintain the aspect ratio.

38 Replace the text Candidate name (at the top of the page) with your name, centre

number and candidate number.

39 Replace the text click here (at the bottom of the page) with the image N7ICON.GIF

Make this a link in the same window to HOMEPAGE.HTM



41 Save the page as N7OFFERS.HTM


8

© UCLES 2007 0418/03/O/N/07

You are going to create and edit a presentation for this company. The medium for delivery will be a multimedia projector. You will need to produce presenter notes and audience notes with the slides. � 42 Set up a new presentation consisting of 3 slides.

On the master slide: 43 The slide master must have a very light blue background and your Centre number,

candidate number and name in a small black font placed in the top right corner. It must also contain a clipart image of a peripheral device for a computer as a logo placed in the bottom right corner. The logo must be resized so that no text or other object overlaps it. Include the slide number in the bottom left of the footer.


Heading: Black, centre aligned, large font (48 point) Subheading: Dark red (or maroon), left aligned, medium font (32 point) Bulleted list: Red, left aligned, small font (24 point). Use a bullet of your choice

On the first slide: 45 Enter the heading Hothouse Design for Computer Peripherals

46 Enter the subheading We offer a full range of peripherals for PCs and Macs

below the heading.


I am here on behalf of the Sales department of Hothouse Design.

On the second slide: 48 Enter the heading Printers of all types in the same style as the first slide.

49 Enter the following bulleted list on the left side of the slide.

• Ink Jet

• Laser

• Thermal

9


� 50 Enter the text and for all budgets: below the bulleted list on the left side of the

slide as a subheading.

51 Enter the following bulleted list below the subheading on the left side of the slide.

• Budget from £99

• Home office from £199

• Network from £459

52 Place the image N7PRINT.JPG so that it fills most of the right half of the slide.


53 Add a red vertical line, 5 points thick, between the bulleted lists and the image.

54 Both bulleted lists should have each bullet set to appear one at a time using the

same animation effect. No other elements on the slide should be animated.

55 Add the following presenter notes to this slide: All the latest printer technologies

are available.

On the third slide: 56 Enter the heading Storage media special offers in the same style as the first slide.


• CD-R

• CD-RW

• DVD-R

• DVD-RW

58 Using a suitable software package, load the file N7SALES.CSV

Add together the total sales for both makes where the Type is CD-R Create a bar chart from the data using only the Type and the Sales. Do not include a legend. Add the label Type to the category axis and Total Sales to the value axis. Make sure that all of the Type labels are visible. Place this bar chart on the left side of the slide.


Sales of these products have been spectacular, as can be seen by the graph.

10



© UCLES 2007 0418/03/O/N/07

For the whole presentation: � 60 Use the same transitional effect between each slide.

61 Save the presentation using a new filename. Print the presentation showing all of

the presenter notes.

62 Print the presentation showing audience notes with three slides to the page and

space for the audience to make notes.




• your Centre number, candidate number and name are included


• borders of both the tables are set to 2 point

• the cell padding of both tables is set to 10

• the cell spacing of both tables is set to 2

• the table width is set to 100%

• N7CART.JPG is resized to 200 pixels high

• the table width is set to 600 pixels

• the hyperlink from Special Offers opens N7OFFERS.HTM in a new window called _external

• N7MEDIA.JPG is resized to 300 pixels wide

• N7ICON.JPG has been changed to .gif format

• N7ICON.GIF is resized to 40 pixels wide and 42 pixels high

• N7ICON.GIF hyperlinks to HOMEPAGE.HTM



*0000000000*




2 hours 30 minutes








If you have produced rough copies of printouts, these should be neatly crossed through to indicate that they are not the copy to be marked.


2


You work for a company called Hothouse Design. You are going to perform some clerical tasks for this company. �

1 Prepare an e-mail message to be sent to [email protected] which contains the subject line June 2008


• your name

• your Centre number


• the text Please send the instructions that I need



Print a screen shot to show evidence of this search in your web browser.





• with the subject line ICTC Report


• your name



• the text The file you require is attached



Send the e-mail.

3


You are now going to edit a document about the sales of tea and coffee. �

6 Using a suitable software package, load the file J8ICTCO.RTF

7 Set the page size to A4



10 Place in the header:

• an automated file name left aligned

• your Centre number and candidate number right aligned.

Place in the footer:

• your name left aligned

• today’s date centre aligned

• an automated page number right aligned.

Make sure that all the alignments match the page orientation and margins.

Make sure that headers and footers are displayed on each page.

11 Format the entire document into two equally spaced columns, with a 1 centimetre gap between the columns.

12 Set all of the text to a sans-serif font.

13 Set all of the text to 1.5 line spacing.

14 Do not change the alignment of the text from the source file.

15 Set all of the text to 10 point.



18 Make this first page a title page by adding the heading The International Coffee and Tea Company



21 Make the heading underlined.

22 Add the text Report by: and add your name as a subheading and place this below the heading.

23 Set both the heading and subheading to the same serif font.

24 Set the font size of the subheading to 18 point.

25 Make the subheading italic.

26 Make the subheading left aligned.

27 Move the paragraph that starts We offer flavour notes as a guide… so that it becomes the third paragraph.

4


� 28 Change the bulleted list:

• seek the finest products available

• buy direct from known producers

• build “Fair trade” relationships

• allow customers to “try before you buy”

• follow up feedback from customers

to use a different bullet character.

29 Insert a table with three columns and four rows after the last paragraph.

30 Enter the following data into the table:

Hothouse Design Role ICT Co.

Joginder Web Design John

Jamal Database Design Sara

Mandy On-line Security Suresh

31 Format only the text in the heading row of this table to bold and underlined.

32 Place the image J8TEAPOT.JPG at the beginning of the sentence that starts Our range of tea is chosen from…

Align it with the top line of the paragraph and the left margin of the column.

33 Resize the image to 4 centimetres high and maintain the aspect ratio.

Flip the image horizontally.

Make sure the text wraps around and below the image.

It may look like this:

34 Place the image J8COFFEE.JPG at the beginning of the paragraph that starts Our range of coffees is selected only from…

Align it with the top line of the paragraph and the left margin.

5


�

35 Crop the image so that only the cup is visible.

Resize the image to 3 centimetres high and maintain the aspect ratio.

Make sure the text wraps around and below the image.


36 Save the document.

You are going to prepare some reports for the company.

37 Using a suitable database package, import the file J8PRODS.CSV

Assign the following data types to the fields.

Category Text

Country Text

Code Numeric / Integer

Product Text

Stock Numeric / Integer

Reorder Numeric / Integer

Price Numeric / Currency / 2 decimal places

Special Boolean / Logical

Notes Text

Make sure that you use these field names. You may add another field as a primary key field if your software requires this.

38 Save a screen shot showing the field names and data types used. Print a copy of this screen shot. Make sure that your name, Centre number and candidate number are included on this printout.

39 Insert the following three records:

Category Country Code Product Stock Reorder Price Special

Tea China 132 Orange Blossom 49 50 4.4 No

Tea China 144 China Rose 25 50 2.3 No

Coffee Guatemala 406 Guatemalan El Pulcal 35 50 2.75 No


40 Save the data.

6


�


• contains a new field called Cost which is calculated at run-time. This field will calculate the Price multiplied by the Reorder quantity

• has the Cost field set as Currency with 2 decimal places

• shows only the records where the Stock is 50 or less and the product is not a Special order

• shows only the fields Category, Country, Code, Product, Stock, Price and Cost and their labels in full


• has a page orientation of landscape

• sorts the data into ascending order of Code (with 7 at the top)

• calculates the total cost of the order below the Cost column

• has the total cost formatted to currency with 2 decimal places

• has the label Total Cost of Order for the total

• includes the heading Reorder List at the top of the page

• has your name, Centre number and candidate number on the right in the footer.


43 Produce labels from all the data which:

• have a page orientation of portrait

• fit two side by side on the page

• show only the records that where Special is Yes and the Notes field is not blank

• show only the fields Code, Product, Price and Notes each on a separate line

• are sorted into ascending order of Product

• include the heading ICTC Special Products centred at the top of each label

• have your name, Centre number and candidate number on the left at the bottom of each label.

The page layout may look like this

44 Save and print these labels.


• shows a summary of only the Country, Product and Stock fields

• performs a count of the number of Products for each Country

• calculates the sum of the number of items in Stock for each Country

• only reports where Products number more than 3


7


�

47 Import this data into your document as a table after the paragraph which ends: …and also the quantity of stock we hold from each country:

Make sure that all required fields and their labels are fully visible and that there is a blank line above and below the table.








49 Save and print the document.

You are now going to prepare a presentation for the company.

50 Import the file J8ICTWEB.RTF and place the text as slides in a new presentation.

(The text within the file should appear on six new slides as headings and bulleted lists.

NB if your presentation software cannot import the .rtf file, then open the file and copy and paste the text into six new slides in your presentation software.)

51 Enter your name, Centre number and candidate number at the bottom of the master slide.

52 Insert a new slide before slide one.

Select a layout for the slide that has a title with a sub-title below.

Enter the text Website Developments as the title for this slide.

Enter the text Report by: and add your name as the subtitle for this slide.

53 On the last slide you need to make some amendments to the suggested CSS styles, h1 and li.

h1 should be pure green. Change the colour code to pure green (with no red or blue elements).

Lists are going to be in italics. Add coding to the li style to give a font style of italic.

54 Add the following presenter notes to the last slide

We are suggesting some changes to styles for the web pages.

8



0418/02/M/J/08

�

55 Apply the same transition to all slides.

56 Set bullet points to appear one by one on all slides.

57 Print an outline of the presentation (showing a list of the slide headings and bullet points).

58 Print the last slide on its own showing the presenter notes.

59 Print one or two screenshots to show that transitions and bullet point animations have been set.

This document consists of 7 printed pages and 1 blank page.


*0000000000*




2 hours 30 minutes










2



1 Prepare an e-mail message to be sent to [email protected] which contains the subject line November 2008


• your name



• the text Please send the instructions that I need.



Print a screen shot to show evidence of this search in your web browser. Make sure that your name, Centre number and candidate number are included in this printout.





• with the subject line Annual Report


• your name



• the text Please find attached the file you require.



Send the e-mail.

3


�


6 Using a suitable database package, import the file N8PRODS.CSV


Category Text Country Text Code Numeric / Integer Product Text Stock Numeric / Integer Reorder Numeric / Integer Price Numeric / Currency / 2 decimal places Special Boolean / Logical Notes Text




Category Country Code Product Stock Reorder Price Special

Tea China 146 Lotus

Blossom 35 50 2.3 N

Tea China 132 Orange

Blossom 49 50 4.4 N

Tea China 144 China Rose 25 50 2.3 N

9 Check your data entry for errors.

10 Save the data.


• shows only the records where the Country is Colombia or Guatemala or Peru

• shows only the fields Code, Product and Price

• is sorted into ascending order of Country

• has the title Coffees from the Americas




4


�


• contains a new field called Cost which is calculated at run-time. This field will calculate the Price multiplied by the Reorder quantity

• has the Cost field formatted to currency with 2 decimal places

• shows only the fields Category, Country, Code, Product, Stock, Reorder, Price and Cost and their labels in full

• shows only the records where the Stock is less than 50 and the product is not a Special order



• sorts the data into ascending order of Product (with Bannockburn at the top)

• calculates the total cost of the order below the Cost column

• has the total cost formatted to currency with 2 decimal places

• has a label Cost of Stock Order to the left of the total cost

• includes the title Supplier Order List at the top of the page

• has your name, Centre number and candidate number on the left in the footer.



• shows only the records which contain the word decaffeinated in the Notes field


• shows only the fields Code, Product, Price and Stock

• is sorted into descending order of Code


17 Using the file N8CHART.CSV, create a comparative vertical bar chart to show the number of sales of each product per month. Include data for May to December only.

18 The category axis should show the name of the month and the value axis the number of sales.

19 Give the chart the title Sales last year

20 Label the category axis Month

21 Label the value axis Number sold

22 The chart should show a legend to identify the two products

23 Save the chart for later use.

5


�

You are now going to edit a document about the sales of tea and coffee.

24 Using a suitable software package, load the file N8ICTTCO.RTF





• your name and candidate number left aligned

• your Centre number right aligned.


• an automated file name left aligned

• an automated page number centre aligned

• today’s date right aligned.




30 Set all the text (except in the table) to 1.5 line spacing.


32 Set the font size for all of the text to 12 point.

33 Move the text

Although as a nation we are one of the largest tea consumers it is widely acknowledged that nearly all of the tea imported into Britain is of the “poorest quality imaginable”. For the past ten years we are pleased to have played a small part in changing this.

so that it becomes the first paragraph of the document.

34 Insert the heading International Coffee and Tea Traders at the beginning of the document.

35 Make the heading right aligned.


37 Make only the words Coffee and Tea in the heading bold and italic.

38 Insert the subheading Our first ten years of trading on a new line below the heading.

39 Set the font size for this subheading to 16 point.

6


�

40 Make the subheading centre aligned.

41 Make the subheading underlined.

42 Set only the heading and subheading to a sans-serif font.

43 Insert a page break after the subheading and before the body text.

44 Change the bulleted list:

• seek the finest products available

• buy direct from known producers

• build “Fair trade” relationships

• allow customers to “try before you buy”

• follow up feedback from customers.

to a numbered list starting with 1.

45 Indent this numbered list by at least 2 centimetres.

46 Find the table at the end of the document.

Delete the last row of the table.

47 Add a fourth column to the table.

48 Enter the following data into the new column:

ICTT Area Hothouse Design Budget allocated

Anita Web Design Francine 3000

Juan Database Design Mariam 2500

Celine On-line security Ahmed 1500

49 Format the text in the heading row of the table to be centre aligned and italic.

50 Make the numbers in the last column right aligned.

51 Apply a light grey shading to the cells in the top row of the table.

52 Place the image N8COFFEE.JPG at the beginning of the paragraph that starts

Our range of coffees is selected only from…

Align it with the top line of the paragraph and the left margin.

7

© UCLES 2008 0418/02/O/N/08

�

53 Crop the image so that only the coffee pot is visible

Re-size the image to 9 centimetres high and maintain the aspect ratio.

Make sure the text wraps round and below the image.


54 Import the data that you saved at Step 16 into your document. Place this data as a table after the paragraph

One of the lessons we have learned from our customer feedback is that some of you prefer decaffeinated varieties, so we have added these products to our regular list:

Make sure that all required fields and their labels are fully visible with no text wrapped and that there is a blank line above and below the table.

55 Insert a page break before the paragraph:

The following chart shows sales for last year:

56 Import the chart you saved at Step 23 into the document. Place the chart after the paragraph:

The following chart shows sales for last year:

57 Resize the chart to fit within the margins.


Place page breaks, if necessary, to make sure that:

• tables and charts do not overlap two pages

• numbered lists do not overlap two pages





8



0418/02/O/N/08

BLANK PAGE



*0000000000*




2 hours 30 minutes









2



1 Using a suitable software package, load the file J8PHONE.CSV

2 In the Department column use a lookup function to show the department name. Use the Dcode column for the lookup value and the file J8CODE.CSV for the array. Make sure that you use both absolute and relative referencing within your function.

Replicate this function so that the department name for each of the 7 items is shown.

3 Enter the following data into the model

Code Rate

C 1.1

I 3

P 1.6

4 Name the cell containing 1.1 Cheap

Name the cell containing 3 Intl

Name the cell containing 1.6 Peak

5 Format these three cells as numbers to 1 decimal place.

6 Format cells A2, A3 and A4 so that they are right aligned.

7 Use a Countif function (that includes both absolute and relative referencing) in cell C7, to count the number of MD entries in the Dcode column. Do not count any entries in rows 1 to 13.

Replicate this function into cells C8 to C13 to count the number of calls from other departments.

8 Use a function (that includes both absolute and relative referencing) in cell D7, to calculate the sum of the Duration column if the Dcode column contains MD

Do not include rows 1 to 13.

Replicate this function into cells D8 to D13 to sum the Total Duration for each Dcode

9 In the Units column (Cell E16) use an IF function to calculate the units used.

If the Code is C then multiply the named cell Cheap by the Duration

If the Code is I then multiply the named cell Intl by the Duration

If the Code is P then multiply the named cell Peak by the Duration

If the Code is not C, I or P then the units used should be zero.

Replicate this function so that the Units for each item are shown.

10 Format all cells in rows 1, 6 and 15 to be centre aligned.

11 Format all cells in rows 1, 6 and 15 so that they are bold.

3


12 Format only the Units column to no decimal places.


14 Save the data model and print a copy of the sheet showing the formulae and functions used. Make sure that the contents of all cells are visible and that the printout is one page wide. It may be three or four pages tall.

Make sure that your name, Centre number and candidate number are printed in the header of the page.


16 Save the data model and print a copy of the sheet showing the values. Make sure that the contents of all cells are visible and that the printout is one page wide.



Hide column D.

18 Interrogate the data, to find all the items where the Code is I

Print this data.


19 Select all of the data.

Leave the rows 1 to 14 and column D hidden.

Hide column C.

Interrogate this data, to find all the calls made on 04/01/2008 where the Dcode is PU or SA

Print this data.


20 Select from all of the data, ONLY the data for Department and Total Duration

Use this data to create a vertical bar chart.

Label the chart with the title Total Duration By Department

Make sure that all category axis labels are fully visible and that there is no legend.

Save this chart in a format that can be imported into a presentation authoring package. Print a copy of this chart.

Make sure that your name, Centre number and candidate number are printed with this chart.

4


You are going to create and edit some web pages for this company. �

21 Download the following files from

http://www.hothouse-design.co.uk/2008June to your own work area:

J8COHIST.HTM J8HIST.JPG J8IMAGE.GIF J8MENU.HTM J8MOVIE.JPG J8PAGE.TXT J8PROD.JPG J8TEL.JPG


• h1 – black, serif font, 20 pixels, centre aligned, bold

• h2 – blue, serif font, bold, 18 pixels, centre aligned

• h3 – black, serif font, 16 pixels, left aligned

• li – black, sans-serif font, 14 pixels, bullet points, left aligned

• p – dark blue, sans-serif font, 14 pixels, left aligned, italic

Save the style sheet and attach it to each web page as you create it. Make sure that the style sheet that you prepare will work in any browser.

23 Print a copy of the style sheet in css format. Make sure that your name, Centre number and candidate number are printed on this page.

24 Using a suitable software package, create a new homepage SAMPLE.HTM

This page will have a table below the heading and menu options below the table. It should look like this:

25 Attach the external style sheet that you saved at Step 22.

Ensure (by removing code if necessary) that, if you are using a WYSIWYG package, the styles are not overridden by the package.

26 In the top left corner add the text Last edited by and add your name, Centre number and candidate number.

Set this text to style h3.

27 Enter the heading Sample Website for client X


28 Below the heading, create a new table which has 5 rows and 3 columns.

5


�


A

B C

D E

F G

H

J

30 Set the cell padding for the table to 6, the cell spacing for the table to 6 and the width of the table to 100%


32 Using the contents of the file J8PAGE.TXT

• place the text Our Vision is to promote … and hosting of a web presence. into cell A and format this as style h3

• place the text Our Products into cell C and format this as style h2

• place the text Company History into cell E and format this as style h2

• place the text Contact Us into cell G and format this as style h2

• place the text Each section of this … included on the web site. into cell H.

Format this text as follows:

• Each section of this table can be used to convey information, or to provide a link to other areas. as style p

• For example there may be: as style p

• your flagship products as style li

• special offers as style li

• price reductions as style li

• in order to entice customers … included on the web site. as style p.

33 Place the image J8PROD.JPG in cell B.

Place the image J8HIST.JPG in cell D.

Place the image J8TEL.JPG in cell F.

Make sure that the whole of each image is visible.

34 Place the image J8MOVIE.JPG in cell J.

Set the width of the image to 400 pixels and the height to 50 pixels. Horizontally align this image in the centre of the cell.

Make sure that the whole image is visible.

6


�

35 Place the contents of J8MENU.HTM

• as a table

• below the table created at Step 28

• to create the menu.

Set the text within this table to style h2.

36 Set the cell padding for the table to 6, the cell spacing for the table to 6 and the width of the table to 100%

37 Set the table border of this table to 2

38 Create hyperlinks for the menu item History and the text Company History (in cell E) to point to the file J8COHIST.HTM which should open in a new window called _history


39 Create an anchor at the top of the page called TOP

Create a hyperlink so that the menu item Home links to the anchor TOP

40 Save the page as SAMPLE.HTM

Print this page as it is viewed in your browser.

Print a copy of the HTML source.

41 Open the file J8COHIST.HTM

Import the image J8IMAGE.GIF into the right cell of the table.

Resize this image to 300 pixels wide and maintain the aspect ratio.

42 Replace the text Candidate name (at the top of the page) with your name, Centre number and candidate number.

43 Create a hyperlink so that the text Home links in the same window to the file SAMPLE.HTM

44 Attach the external style sheet that you saved at Step 22.

Ensure (by removing code if necessary) that if you are using a WYSIWYG package, the styles are not overridden by the package.

45 Save the page as J8COHIST.HTM



7


One of the work experience trainees in the company needs to learn how to create a master slide for a presentation. You are going to produce a sample master slide for this trainee. �

46 Set up a new presentation consisting of 3 slides.

On the master slide:

47 The master slide must have a white background with one vertical green stripe, two horizontal green stripes and one diagonal green stripe. Each stripe should be about 6 points wide. It should look like this:

48 Include an automated slide number in the bottom left of the footer. Make sure that it does not overlap any of the lines added at Step 47.

49 Place a clipart image of a pen or pencil as a logo in the top right corner.

The logo must be resized so that it will not overlap the diagonal line added at Step 47.

50 Enter your name, Centre number and candidate number, right aligned between the two green lines at the bottom of the master slide. Use a black, 12 point, sans-serif font. It should look like this:

8



0418/03/M/J/08

�

51 Add the text Hothouse Design at the top of the master slide. The text should appear as a heading on every slide of your presentation in a black, 48 point sans-serif font. This should not overlap any of the other objects on the slide. It should look like this:

52 On slide 1 add the text Slide 1 example in a blue, 24 point, left aligned serif font.

On slide 2 add the text This is slide 2 in a blue, 24 point, left aligned serif font.

On slide 3 add the chart saved at Step 20.

Make sure that these objects do not overlap any of the master slide items.

53 Save the presentation using a new filename. Print the presentation showing only the slides, with each slide on a separate page.

After the examination time – on the html printouts of your webpage Highlight the portions of the code which show:

• your name, Centre number and candidate number



• the table width is set to 100%

• the cell spacing and cell padding are set to 6 in both tables in SAMPLE.HTM

• J8MOVIE.JPG is resized to 400 pixels wide and 50 pixels high and is centered

• the hyperlinks from History and Company History open J8COHIST.HTM in a new window called _history

• the anchor TOP is created

• the hyperlink from Home points to the anchor TOP in SAMPLE.HTM

• J8IMAGE.GIF is resized to 300 pixels wide

• the hyperlink from Home in J8COHIST.HTM points to SAMPLE.HTM



*0000000000*




2 hours 30 minutes










2


You work for a company called Hothouse Design. You are going to perform some clerical tasks for this company. Your manager has asked you to set up a presentation for the board of directors. The medium for delivery will be a multimedia projector. Presenter notes need to be produced with the slides. �

1 Set up a new presentation consisting of 4 slides.

On the master slide:

2 The master slide must have a light grey background on the left hand side (about 1/5 of the width) with one vertical red stripe as a border for the grey background and two horizontal red stripes. Each stripe should be about 6 points wide. It should look like this:

3 Include an automated slide number in the bottom right of each slide. Make sure that it does not overlap any of the lines added at Step 2.

4 Place a clipart image of a telephone as a logo in the top left corner.

The logo must be resized so that it is within and does not overlap the three red lines added at Step 2.

3


�

5 Enter your name, Centre number and candidate number, left aligned in the white area, at the bottom of the master slide. Use a black, 12 point, sans-serif font. It should look like this:

6 Add the text Telephone Analysis as a header, left aligned in a black, 44 point sans-serif font at the top of the master slide. This should be between the red lines and not overlap any of the other objects on the slide. It should look like this:

On each slide you are going to add text and images to the main white area of the slide. No text or objects should overlap any items on the master slide.


Heading:

Subheading:

Bulleted list:

Red, left aligned, 60 point (large font)

Red, centre aligned, 36 point (medium font)

Black, left aligned, 24 point (small font). Use a bullet of your choice.

On the first slide:

8 Enter the heading:

Hothouse Design

9 Below the heading, enter the subheading:

Snapshot analysis of telephone use within the company


This brief presentation will identify some of the results of our recent telephone use analysis.

4



�

11 Enter the subheading:

Departments analysed

in the same style as the first slide.


� Accounts

� Cleaning

� Human Resources

� Information Systems

� Maintenance

� Transport


� Production

� Purchasing

� Sales

� Security

� Site Management

14 Both bulleted lists should have each bullet set to appear one at a time using the same animation effect. No other elements of the slide should be animated.


Telephones were used by other departments but some have been removed from the sample.

On the third slide:

16 Create a pie chart from the following data:

Call type Minutes

International 1640

Peak Rate 7842

Cheap Rate 1543

Internal 16805

17 Place the chart in the centre of the slide. Enlarge the chart so that it is clearly

visible.

Each segment must show the call type and percentage value. Do not display a legend.


As you can see the vast majority of our calls are internal. These figures are the average values per day for all departments, using a monitoring period of 2 weeks.

5


On the fourth slide:

�

19 Enter the text:

Replace some calls with:

as a subheading.


� Video conference

� E-mail

� SMS messages

21 Place a different clipart image showing a telephone to the right of the bulleted list.


We must look at cheaper media in order to reduce our operating costs.


23 Use the same transitional effect between each slide.

24 Save the presentation. Print the presentation showing all of the presenter notes.

25 Print the presentation showing 3 slides to a page with space for the audience to make notes.



Your manager has asked you to help develop the company website.


http://www.hothouse-design.co.uk/2008November to your own work area:

N8ABOUT.GIF N8CLIENT. GIF N8CONTAC.GIF N8CONTAC.HTM N8HOTDES.HTM N8STYLE.CSS N8WHAT. GIF N8WORK. GIF

6


�

29 Using a suitable software package, edit the file N8STYLE.CSS so that only the following changes are made:

• set styles h1 and h2 to red

• set style p to dark blue

• set styles h1, h2 and h3 so that the primary font is Times New Roman, but if this is not available the browser selects any serif font

• set styles li and p so that the primary font is Arial, but if this is not available the browser selects any sans-serif font

• centre align styles h1 and h2

• set style h1 to bold and italic.

Make sure that the stylesheet that you have edited will work in any browser.

Save the stylesheet as N8STYLE1.CSS and attach it to each web page as you create or amend it.

30 Print a copy of the stylesheet. Make sure that your name, Centre number and candidate number are printed on this page.

31 Open the file N8HOTDES.HTM

32 Attach the external stylesheet that you saved at Step 29.

33 Replace the text Homepage with the heading Hothouse Design Ltd

Set the heading to style h1.

34 At the bottom of the page add the text Last updated by and add your name, Centre number and candidate number.


35 Replace the text Image 1 here with the image N8ABOUT.GIF

Replace the text Image 2 here with the image N8WHAT.GIF

Replace the text Image 3 here with the image N8CLIENT.GIF

Replace the text Image 4 here with the image N8WORK.GIF

Replace the text Image 5 here with the image N8CONTAC.GIF

Make sure that the whole of each image is visible.

36 Centre align all cells in the top row of the table.

Right align all cells in the second row of the table.

37 Set the background colour of only the top row of the table to black.

38 Set the cell padding for the table to 20 and the cell spacing for the table to 5

Set the table width to 100% and the height to 300 pixels.


40 Create hyperlinks from the text Contact us and from the image N8CONTAC.GIF to point to the file N8CONTA1.HTM which should open in a new window called _contact

Note that the web page which you have linked to has not yet been created.

7


�

41 Save the page as N8HOTDE1.HTM



42 Open the file N8CONTAC.HTM

Attach the external stylesheet that you saved at Step 29.

43 At the bottom of the page add the text Last updated by and add your name, Centre number and candidate number.


44 Save the page as N8CONTA1.HTM



Your manager has asked you to develop a spreadsheet about telephone calls.

45 Using a suitable software package, load the file N8PHONE.CSV and save it into your own work area as N8PHONE1

Load the file N8CODE.CSV and save it into your own work area.

46 In the Minutes column (Cell D11) use a function to calculate the whole number (integer) of minutes for each call, by dividing the Duration by 60

Replicate this function so that the Minutes for each call are shown.

47 In the Seconds column (Cell E11) calculate the number of remaining seconds for each call using the formula:

Duration – (Minutes multiplied by 60)

Replicate this formula so that the Seconds for each call are shown.

48 In the Length column (Cell F11) use an IF function to show:

• If the Minutes are less than 6 then show the word Short

• If the Minutes are greater than 5 and are less than 12 then show the word Medium

• If the Minutes are greater than 11 then show the word Long

Replicate this function so that the Length of each call is shown.

49 In the Name column use a lookup function to show the staff name. Use the SCode column for the lookup value and the external file N8CODE.CSV for the array. Make sure that you use both absolute and relative referencing within your function.

Replicate this function so that the names for each of the 7 members of staff are shown.

50 In cell C2 use a function that includes both absolute and relative referencing to calculate the sum of the Minutes column if the SCode column contains GBA. Do not include rows 1 to 10.

Replicate this function into cells C3 to C8 to sum the total Minutes for each SCode.

51 Format all cells in rows 1 and 10 only so that they are centre aligned.

8



© UCLES 2008 0418/03/O/N/08

�

52 Format all cells in rows 1 and 10 only so that they are bold.



Make sure that the contents of all cells are visible and that the printout is one page wide. It may be three or four pages tall.



56 Save the data model and print a copy of the sheet showing the values.

Make sure that the contents of all cells are visible and that the printout is one page wide. It may be two pages tall.


57 Interrogate the data to find all the calls where the Length is Long

Print this data.


58 Interrogate the data to find all the calls where the Length is Long and where the SCode is VCR or RSP

Print this data.


After the examination time On your html printout highlight those portions of the code which show that:

• The external stylesheet is attached to both web pages

• The table border is set to 5

• The table cell padding is set to 20

• The table cell spacing is set to 5

• The table width is set to 100%

• The table height is set to 300 pixels

• Row 1 of the table is centre aligned

• Row 1 of the table has a black background

• Row 2 of the table is right aligned

• The hyperlinks from both text and image open N8CONTA1.HTM in a new window called _contact



*0000000000*


INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY 0417/02


2 hours 30 minutes




Carry out every instruction in each step.

Steps are numbered on the left hand side of the page. On the right hand side of the page for each step, you will find a box which you can tick (�) when you have completed it; this will help you track your progress through the test.


At the end of the test put all your printouts into the Assessment Record Folder.



2



1 Prepare an e-mail message to be sent to [email protected] which contains the subject line Holidays 2009



• your name


• the text: Please send the instructions that I need.



3 Take a screenshot to show you have searched for, found and are ready to save, the specified file.

4 Print this screenshot.

3


You are now going to edit a document about the sales of holidays. �

5 Using a suitable software package, load the file J9SALES.RTF



8 Set all the margins to 2 centimetres.

9 Format the entire document into 2 columns of equal width, with a 2 centimetre gap between the columns.


11 Set all the text to 1.5 line spacing.




15 Format ONLY the first page of the document into a single column.

16 Make this first page a title page by adding the heading Very Special Holidays 2009 in a sans-serif font.

17 Centre align the heading.


19 Make only the words Very Special italic and underlined.

20 Below the heading, add the subheading Sales Report by and add your name.

21 Set the text used for the subheading to the same sans-serif font as the heading.


23 Right align the subheading.

24 Place your name left aligned, your Centre number centre aligned, and your candidate number right aligned in the header.

Place an automated page number left aligned in the footer.

Make sure that headers and footers do not appear on page one, but are displayed on all other pages.

Make sure that all the alignments match the margin settings.

25 Move the third paragraph that starts:

Our new offering is at the Paradise Retreat…

so that it becomes the second paragraph.

26 Change the numbered list:

1. Strand

2. Oxford Street

3. Regent Street

to a bulleted list.

4


�

27 Find the table which has the word Code in the top left cell.

Complete the table by adding the Hotel and Location details as shown below.

Make sure that the font matches the font specified for the body text of the document and that all of the table is visible with no text wrapping.

The table must fit within the column and must not change its position in the document.

Code Location Hotel

JGBEXL Jersey Excelsior

ALMGPL Almeria Gran Lujo Playa

GCAPRG Grand Cayman Paradise Retreat

28 Find the table which has the word Staff in the top left cell.

Copy the staff details (Firstname, Familyname, Office and Startdate) from the file J9STAFF.CSV and paste them into the table to the right of the staff codes.

29 Delete the first column from the table (containing staff codes).

Delete the row from the table containing Lucille Mather

30 Make sure that the text in the table is formatted to match the body text of the document.

31 Format the column headings to be italic, underlined and centred.

32 Format the background of the top row to be a light grey shade.

33 Format all borders in the table to appear when printed.

34 Make sure that all of the contents of the table are visible with no text wrap.


35 Import a graphic image showing an island or a hotel (from clip art, scanner, digital camera or elsewhere), and place this immediately after the text:

…our next mystery destination in our new brochure:




• the text wraps above and below the image.


37 Save the document using a new filename.

5


�

38 Using a suitable database package, import the file J9SALES.CSV

Assign the following data types to the fields:

Field name Data type

Staff Text

Date Date

Booking Text

Week Numeric / Integer


Number Numeric / Integer

Tour Boolean / Logical

Ensure that you use these field names. You may add another field as a primary key if your software requires this.



Staff Date Booking Week Price Number Tour

JP 29-Mar-2009 ALMGPL 37 £399.00 2 Yes

FD 29-Mar-2009 ALMGLP 37 £399.00 2 No

JP 31-Mar-2009 ALMGPL 37 £399.00 6 No


41 Save the data.



• fits on a single page wide

• contains a new field called Income which is calculated at run-time. This field will calculate Price multiplied by Number

• has the Income field formatted as currency with 2 decimal places

• shows only the records where the Week is 37

• shows only the fields Staff, Date, Booking, Price, Number and Income


• sorts the data into ascending order of Date (with 01/01/2009 at the top)

• includes the heading Week 37 Sales at the top of the page

• calculates the total value of the Income field and displays this at the end of the report under the Income field values, formatted as currency with 2 decimal places

• has the label Total Income to the left of the total the value of the Income field

• has your name, candidate number and Centre number on the left at the foot of each page.


6


�




• shows only the records where the booking was for holidays in Week 35, the booking Date was between 01/01/2009 and 31/01/2009 inclusive, and the Tour was Yes

• shows only the fields Staff, Date, Booking and Number


• sorts the data into ascending order of Date and then ascending order of Staff

• includes the heading Mini tours booked at the top of the page



46 Produce a new report which:

• shows a summary of the week 37 sales only

• uses only the Staff and Income fields

• calculates the sum of the Income field for each member of Staff

• counts the number of holidays sold by each member of Staff

47 Export this data in a format which can be opened by your graph/charting package.


48 Import this data into your document as a table immediately after the paragraph which ends:

The sales summary for week 37 is included here:


49 You now need to open the data exported at Step 47 in an appropriate charting package.

50 Create a pie chart showing the number (count) of holidays sold by each member of staff.

51 Add a title to the chart Holiday sales per employee

52 Label the segments with the Staff initials and the number of holidays sold.

Pullout or highlight the segment representing the largest number of sales (JP).

Do not include a legend.


7



0417/02/M/J/09

�

54 Import this chart into your document immediately after the sentence:

We would like to congratulate Joan Peters at the Strand office.

Make sure that all labels are fully visible.

Make sure there is one blank line above the chart.

Resize the chart so that it fits into a single column and maintain its aspect ratio. It may look

like this:

(please note that the chart may not appear in the position shown in the diagram).



• tables do not overlap two columns












• with the subject line Sales report


• your name



• the text: Here is the Sales report.

58 Attach your document to this e-mail.


Send the e-mail.


IB09 11_0417_02/XRP © UCLES 2009 [Turn over

*0000000000*




2 hours 30 minutes










2



1 Prepare an e-mail message to be sent to [email protected] which contains the subject line Holiday Update 2009



• your name


• the text: Please send the files for the report.



3 Take a screenshot to show you have searched for and found the specified file.

4 Print this screenshot.

3


You are now going to edit a document about the sales of holidays. �

5 Using a suitable software package, load the file N9SALES.RTF



8 Set the top and bottom margins to 3 centimetres and the left and right margins to 2 centimetres.

9 Format the entire document into 2 columns of equal width, with a 1 centimetre gap between the columns.



12 Make all the text fully justified.



15 Format ONLY the first page of the document into a single column.

16 Make this first page a title page by adding the heading VSH Second Quarter Report in a sans-serif font.

17 Centre align the heading.


19 Make ONLY the letters VSH italic and underlined.

20 Below the heading, add the subheading Report presented by and add your name.

21 Set the text used for the subheading to the same sans-serif font as the heading.


23 Right align the subheading.

24 Place your name left aligned, your Centre number centre aligned and your candidate number right aligned in the header.

Place today’s date right aligned in the footer.

Make sure that headers and footers do not appear on page one, but are displayed on all other pages.

Make sure that all the alignments match the margin settings.

25 Move the third paragraph that starts:

The Jersey hotel and golf complex is well established and a favourite with our guests …

so that it becomes the second paragraph.

4


�

26 Change the bulleted list:

• Training needs analysis

• Induction

• On-the-Job training

• Off-the-Job training

to a numbered list.

27 Find the table containing the word Code in the top left cell.

Complete the table by adding the hotel and location details as shown below:

Code Location Hotel

JGBEXL Jersey Excelsior

ALMGPL Almeria Gran Lujo Playa

GCAPRG Grand Cayman Paradise Retreat

MALTPG Maldives Paradise Golf

SEYNSG Seychelles Nine South Golf Make sure that the font matches the font specified for the body text of the document and that all of the table is visible with no text wrapping.

The table must fit within the column and must not change its position in the document 28 Locate the table with the word Staff in the top left cell.

Copy all the details of the staff who work in the Strand office only from the file N9STAFF.CSV and paste these into the table.

29 Delete the first column from the table (containing staff codes).

Delete from the table the column containing the heading Office

30 Make sure that the text in the table is formatted to match the body text of the document.

31 Format the column headings to be italic and underlined.

32 Format the background of the top row to be a light grey shade.

33 Format all borders in the table to appear when printed.

34 Make sure that all of the contents of the table are visible with no text wrap.


35 Import a graphic image showing a beach or a hotel (from clip art, scanner, digital camera or elsewhere), and place this immediately after the text:

…Here is a glimpse of what is on offer:

5


�




• the text wraps above and below the image.


37 Save the document using a new filename.

38 Using a suitable database package, import the file N9BOOK.CSV

Assign the following data types to the fields:

Field name Data type

Staff Text

Office Text

Date Date

Booking Text

Week Numeric / Integer



Tour Boolean / Logical

Ensure that you use these field names. You may add another field as a primary key if your software requires this.



Staff Office Date Booking Week Price Number Tour

AR Strand 06/06/2009 ALMGPL 35 399.00 4 Yes




41 Save the data.

6


�

42 Produce a new report which:



• contains a new field called Income which is calculated at run-time. This field will calculate Price multiplied by Number

• has the Income field formatted as currency with 2 decimal places

• shows only the records where the Week is 36, the booking Date was made between 1st April 2009 and 30th June 2009 inclusive and the Office is Strand

• shows only the fields Staff, Date, Booking, Week, Number, Tour and Income


• sorts the data into ascending order of Date and then into ascending order of Staff

• includes the heading Week 36 for Strand at the top of the page

• calculates the total value of the Income field and displays this at the end of the report under the Income field values, formatted as currency

• has the label Total Income to the left of the total

• has your name, candidate number and Centre number on the left below the report.


44 Produce a report from all the data which:



• shows only those records where:

Week is 35 and

Staff is AR and

Tour is Yes and

Booking is ALMGPL

• shows only the fields Staff, Date, Booking, Price and Number


• sorts the data into ascending order of Date

• includes the heading AR tour bookings for week 35 at the top of the page



7


�


• uses only the Staff and Number fields

• calculates the sum of the Number field for each member of Staff

• counts the number of holidays sold by each member of Staff

47 Export this data in a format that can be opened by your graph/charting package.


48 Import this data into your document as a table immediately after the paragraph which ends:

The sales summary for all staff is included here:


49 You now need to open the data exported at Step 47 in an appropriate graph/charting package.

50 Create a pie chart showing the number (count) of holidays sold by each member of staff.

51 Add the title Number of Holidays Sold to the chart.

52 Label the segments with the Staff initials and the number of holidays sold.

Pullout or highlight the segment representing the largest value (AR).

Do not include a legend.


54 Import this chart into your document immediately after the sentence:

The number of the sales made by each member of staff is shown as a chart here:

Make sure that all labels are fully visible.

Make sure there is one blank line above the chart.

Resize the chart so that it fits into a single column and maintain its aspect ratio. It may look like this:

(please note that it may not appear in the position shown in the diagram)

8



© UCLES 2009 0417/02/O/N/09

�



• tables do not overlap two columns


• the chart does not overlap two pages or columns








• copied to [email protected] and [email protected]

• with the subject line Sales update


• your name



• the text: Here is the Sales report.

58 Attach your document to this e-mail.


Send the e-mail.


IB09 06_0417_03/XRP © UCLES 2009 [Turn over

*0000000000*




2 hours 30 minutes










2


You work for a company called Hothouse Design. You are going to update a website for a client called Supa Scuba.

�


http://www.hothouse-design.co.uk/2009June to your own work area:

J9CLOWN.JPG J9CODE.CSV J9DIVE.HTM J9DOLPHI.JPG J9FISH.JPG J9LOGO.JPG J9PAGE.TXT J9SCUBA.HTM J9SHEET.CSV J9SHOAL.JPG J9STYLE1.CSS J9SUNSET.JPG

2 Using a suitable software package, open the webpage J9SCUBA.HTM so that it can be edited.

Attach the stylesheet J9STYLE1.CSS to this webpage.

3 Replace the text Centre number, candidate number, name with your Centre number, candidate number and name.

Change this line of code from paragraph style to style h5.

4 Change the width of the table so that it fills the width of the window in any web browser.

5 Set the cell padding for the table to 2, the cell spacing for the table to 2 and the border of the table to 2

6 Replace the text Place anchor here with an anchor called TOP

In the text Click Here to return to the top of the page, make only the words Click Here a hyperlink to the anchor that you have just created.

7 Replace the text Logo image with the image J9LOGO.JPG

8 Replace the text Sunset image with the image J9SUNSET.JPG

Resize this image so that it becomes 183 pixels wide and 320 pixels high. Do not maintain the aspect ratio.

9 Replace the text Shoal image with the image J9SHOAL.JPG

Create a hyperlink from this image to point to the file J9DIVE.HTM which should open in a new window called _scubadive

10 Replace the text Fish image with the image J9FISH.JPG

11 Replace the text Dolphin image with the image J9DOLPHI.JPG

12 Create a hyperlink from the text Amazing fish to point to the file J9DIVE.HTM which should open in a new window called _scubadive

3


�

13 Save the page as J9SCUBA.HTM



14 Using a suitable software package, open the stylesheet J9STYLE1.CSS

15 Edit the stylesheet to change the styles so that:

• h1 is 48 point

• h5 is left aligned

• h4 is black

• the red and blue components of h1, h2, h3 and h5 remain the same and there is no green component in any of these styles

• the paragraph style has no red component and the green and blue components are set to 50%

16 Save this stylesheet as J9STYLE2.CSS

Print this stylesheet.

17 Open the webpage J9SCUBA.HTM so that it can be edited.

Attach the stylesheet J9STYLE2.CSS to this webpage in place of the current stylesheet.

18 Save the page as J9SCUBA.HTM

Open this page in your browser and print it.


19 Using a suitable software package, open the webpage J9DIVE.HTM so that it can be edited.

Attach the stylesheet J9STYLE2.CSS to this webpage.

20 Replace the text Centre number, candidate number, name with your Centre number, candidate number and name.

21 Replace the text Heading here with the text Supa Scuba Diving Holidays and format this as style h2

4


�

22 Using the contents of the file J9PAGE.TXT replace the text:

• First text here with the text As a company … bespoke holiday service.

Format this as style h4

• Second text here with the text We offer the … the following ideas:

Format this as style h5

• List here with the text Experienced divers … Family packages

Format this text with the following styles:

Text Style Experienced divers p Go deep li Wreck week li Shark experience li Wall dives li Cave dives li Beginners p Meet the fish li Turtle week li Learn to dive li Snorkel with us li Family packages p

Format the two lists as unordered lists.

23 Replace the text Image here with the image J9CLOWN.JPG

Set the width of the image to 280 pixels and maintain its aspect ratio.


25 Create a hyperlink from the text Homepage to point to the file J9SCUBA.HTM which should open in the current window.

Open J9DIVE.HTM in your browser and print it.

Print a copy of the HTML source for J9DIVE.HTM

5


You are going to create a short presentation of 3 slides about the website that you are creating for Supa Scuba. The presentation will be delivered using a multimedia projector. Presenter notes need to be produced with the slides. �

26 Create a new presentation with 3 slides.

The master slide:

27 The master slide must have:

• a pale blue background on the right hand side (about 1/4 of the width of the slide)

• one vertical dark blue line as a border for the pale blue background

• two horizontal dark blue lines

• each line should be 4 points wide. It should look like this:

28 Include an automated slide number, left aligned in the white area at the bottom of the master slide. Make sure that it does not overlap any of the lines added at Step 27.

29 Place an image (from clipart, scanner, digital camera or elsewhere) of one or more fish in the right hand area.

Crop and/or resize the image so that it fits within and will not overlay the dark blue lines added at Step 27. Do not distort the image. Make sure that the image fills more than 50% of the available space.

6


�

30 Enter your name, Centre number and candidate number. Centre align this text in the white area, below the blue line, at the bottom of the master slide. Use a black, 12 point, bold, sans-serif font. It should look like this:

31 Add the text Supa Scuba, left aligned in a dark blue, 48 point sans-serif font at the top of the master slide. This should be above the blue line and not overlap any of the other objects on the slide. It should look like this:

32 Set the following styles for the presentation:

Heading: Subheading:

Bulleted list:

Dark blue, left aligned, large font (60 point)

Blue, centre aligned, medium font (30 point)

Black, left aligned, small font (20 point). Use a bullet of your choice.

On each slide add text and images to the main white area of the slide. No text or objects should overlap any items on the master slide.

On the first slide:

33 Enter the heading New website

34 Enter the subheading Proposed web pages below the heading.


During the development of this new website, we have realised that the proposed design brief may need to be amended.

7


On the second slide: �

36 Enter the subheading Rationale in the same style as the first slide.


� Customer views � Easier site location � Faster navigation � Compliant with new browsers

38 The bulleted list should have each bullet set to appear one at a time using the same animation effect. No other elements of the slide should be animated.


The proposed design brief did not take into account the latest web browsers, or recent customer satisfaction surveys.

On the third slide:

40 Create a pie chart from the following data:

Type of trip 2008 Dives

Go deep 2512

Wreck week 12608

Shark experience 940

Wall dives 12540

Cave dives 353

Drift dives 13247

41 Label the segments with the type of trip and percentage value. Do not display a legend.

Place the chart in the centre of the slide. Enlarge the chart so that it is clearly visible. Make sure the chart is not distorted.


This information could be added to the trips page of the website to indicate the number of dives made in a single year on your trips.


43 Use the same transitional effect between each slide.

44 Save the presentation using a new filename.

Print the presentation showing all the presenter notes.

45 Print a screen shot of slide 2 showing the animation used for the bulleted list.


8


Your manager has asked you to manipulate a spreadsheet about the time and costs involved with some of the webpage development.

�

47 Using a suitable software package, load the file J9SHEET.CSV

48 Place your Centre number, candidate number and name in the header.

49 In the Webpage column use a lookup function to show the company name. Use the Code column for the lookup value and the file J9CODE.CSV for the array. This function must include both absolute and relative referencing and must not use a named range.

Replicate this function so that the company name is shown for each of the 7 codes.

50 In cell C2 use a SUMIF function.

If the value in the Pagecode column matches the content of cell B2, then sum the values from the Minutes column. This function must include both absolute and relative referencing and must not use named ranges. Do not include any entries in rows 1 to 9.

Replicate this function into cells C3 to C8 for each of the other codes.

51 In cell D2 use a formula to calculate the number of whole hours. Use the minutes from cell C2 to help you.

Replicate this function into cells D3 to D8.

52 In cell E2 use a formula to calculate the number of minutes left when the whole hours are removed. Use the values in cells C2 and D2 to help you.

Replicate this formula into cells E3 to E8.

53 Save the data model and print a copy of cells A1 to E23 only, showing the formulae and functions used. Make sure that the contents of all cells in this range are visible and that the printout fits on a single page.

Make sure that your name, Centre number and candidate number are printed in the header.

54 Interrogate the data to show only the entries where the Pagecode is HOL or FP

Sort this data into descending order of minutes.

Hide rows 1 to 9 inclusive.

Print this data.


9



0417/03/M/J/09


• your name, Centre number and candidate number are present on all printouts

• the external stylesheets are attached to the webpages

• the anchor TOP has been placed

• the table borders in the webpages are set to 2 point

• the table is set to the width of the page


• J9SUNSET.JPG is resized to 183 pixels wide by 320 pixels high

• the hyperlink from the text ‘Amazing fish’ opens J9DIVE.HTM in a new window called _scubadive

• the hyperlink from the image J9SHOAL.JPG opens J9DIVE.HTM in a new window called _scubadive

• the text Click Here links to the anchor TOP

• J9CLOWN.JPG is resized to 280 pixels wide

• the hyperlink from the text ‘Homepage’ opens J9SCUBA.HTM in the current window.



*0000000000*




2 hours 30 minutes










2



1 Using a suitable software package, load the file N9SUPP.CSV

2 Place your Centre number, candidate number and name in the header.

3 In the Company column use a LOOKUP function to show the company name. Use the Ccode column for the lookup value and the file N9CODE.CSV for the array. This function must include both absolute and relative referencing and must not use a named range.

Replicate this function so that the company name is shown for each of the 15 codes.

4 Enter the following data into the model

Code Rate

D 1.21

N 1.3

P 1.65

5 Name the cell containing 1.21 Discount

Name the cell containing 1.3 Normal

Name the cell containing 1.65 Premium

6 Format these three named cells as numbers to 2 decimal places.

7 Format cells A2, A3 and A4 so that they are right aligned.

8 Use a COUNTIF function in cell C7 to count the number of products made by the Supplier with a Ccode that matches the contents of cell B7. This function must include both absolute and relative referencing and must not use a named range. Do not count any entries in rows 1 to 23.

Replicate this function into cells C8 to C21 to count the number of products in stock made by each Supplier.


10 Save the data model and print a copy of cells A1 to C21 only, showing the formulae and functions used.

Make sure that the row and column headings and the contents of all cells in this range are visible.

Make sure that the printout fits on a single page.



12 Save the data model and print a copy of cells A1 to C21 only, showing the values.

Make sure that the row and column headings are not visible.

Make sure that the contents of all cells in this range are visible and that the printout fits on a single page.


3


�

13 In the Unit Retail column (Cell F24) use an IF function to calculate the retail price of each unit.

If the Code is D then multiply the named cell Discount by the Unit Purchase price.

If the Code is N then multiply the named cell Normal by the Unit Purchase price.

If the Code is P then multiply the named cell Premium by the Unit Purchase price.

If the Code is not D, N or P then return the Unit Purchase price.

Replicate this function so that the Unit Retail price for each item is shown.

14 In the Retail column (Cell H24) multiply the Unit Retail price by the Pack size to calculate the Retail price for the item.

Replicate this formula so that the Retail price for each item is shown.

15 Format all cells in row 23 to be centre aligned.

16 Format all cells in row 23 so that they are bold.

17 Format all cells in row 23 so that they are italic.

18 Format the data in the Unit Purchase, Unit Retail and Retail columns to Euros (€) with 2 decimal places.

19 Format only the Pack Size column to 0 decimal places.

20 Centre align the Supplier and Code columns from row 24 to row 116 inclusive.


22 Save the data model and print a copy of cells F23 to H116 only, showing the formulae and functions used.

Make sure that the row and column headings and the contents of all cells in this range are visible.


23 Keep the page orientation as landscape.

24 Save the data model and print a copy of rows 23 to 54 only, showing the values. Make sure that the contents of all cells in this range are visible and that the printout fits on a single page.


25 Interrogate the data, to find all the Red items with a Unit Purchase price between 0.51 and 0.58 Euros.

Print this data.


4


You are going to edit some web pages for this company. �


http://www.hothouse-design.co.uk/2009November to your own work area:

N9DOUBLE.JPG N9FILE.JPG N9FOLDER.JPG N9GAFFER.JPG N9GLUE.JPG N9GLUE2.JPG N9OFFERS.HTM N9PAGE.TXT N9PARCEL.JPG N9PEN.JPG N9SELLO.JPG N9STYLES.CSS N9TAPE.HTM N9TAPE.JPG

27 Using a suitable software package, open the webpage N9OFFERS.HTM so that it can be edited.

Attach the stylesheet N9STYLES.CSS to this webpage.

28 Replace the text Candidate name, Centre number, candidate number with your name, Centre number and candidate number.

Change this line of code from style h4 to paragraph style.

29 Change the width of both tables so that they each fill the width of the window in any web browser.

30 Merge the two cells that contain the word Adhesives so that they become a single cell, containing only the word Adhesives

Make sure that this new cell uses 44% of the table width.

31 Merge the two cells that contain the word Files so that they become a single cell, containing only the word Files

Make sure that this new cell uses 44% of the table width.

32 Set the cell padding for both tables to 4, the cell spacing for both tables to 4

Set the table border of the top table to 0 and the table border of the bottom table to 2


In the text Click Here to return to the top of the page, make only the words Click Here a hyperlink to the anchor that you have just created.

34 Replace the text Tape image with the image N9TAPE.JPG

Create a hyperlink from this image to point to the file N9TAPE.HTM which should open in a new window called _adhesivetape

35 Replace the text Glue image with the image N9GLUE.JPG

36 Replace the text File image with the image N9FILE.JPG

37 Replace the text Folder image with the image N9FOLDER.JPG

5


�

38 Replace the text Pen image with the image N9PEN.JPG

Resize this image so that it becomes 100 pixels wide and 300 pixels high. Do not maintain the aspect ratio.

39 Using the contents of the file N9PAGE.TXT

Replace the text Sponsored links here with:

Select from the following sponsored links to take you to our partner companies:

Format this as style p

Align this text to the top of the table cell.

40 Using the contents of the file N9PAGE.TXT

Replace the text Place list here with:

Rootrainer Trees

Rock ICT

Kuroki Koi

Electry

International Tea and Coffee Traders

Format this as style li

41 Save the page as N9OFFERS.HTM



42 Open the file N9TAPE.HTM

Identify 2 new hyperlinks that need to be created from the text on this webpage.

Make a note of the type of hyperlinks required and the text that these hyperlinks will link from but do not create them. You will need this information at Step 54.

6


You have been asked to prepare a short presentation for your team leader giving information about the website. �

43 Create a new presentation with 3 slides.

The master slide:

44 The master slide must have a white background.

45 In the top left corner of the master slide enter the text Hothouse Design Stationery Supplies in a black, 24 point, sans-serif font.

46 In the bottom left corner of the master slide place an automated slide number.

47 In the bottom right corner of the master slide place an image (from clipart, scanner, digital camera or elsewhere) of a pen or pencil as a logo.

48 In the top right corner of the master slide enter your name, Centre number and candidate number in a black, 12 point, sans-serif font.

49 Set the following styles for the presentation:

Heading: Red, 48 point, right aligned serif font.

Subheading: Black, centre aligned, 24 point serif font.

Bulleted list: Black, left aligned, 18 point sans-serif font. Use a bullet of your choice.

On the first slide:

50 Enter the heading Progress on the website

Make sure that this text does not overlap any of the items on the master slide.

51 Add the subheading Current status



52 Enter the heading Webpage N9Tape.htm


53 Enter the subheading This webpage needs improving with:


54 Add a bulleted list with three bullet points.

The first bullet point will contain the text: Consistent spacing between images

The second and third bullet points should list the new hyperlinks to be added to the webpage N9TAPE.HTM. State the types of hyperlinks required and the text that the hyperlinks will link from. You identified these at Step 42.

Make sure that these do not overlap any of the items on the master slide.

55 The bulleted list should have each bullet set to appear one at a time using the same animation effect.

No other elements on the slide should be animated.

7



0417/03/O/N/09

On the third slide: �

56 Enter the heading Image for the glue webpage


57 Open the image N9GLUE2.JPG in a suitable application package.

Flip the image horizontally.

Place and resize the new image so that it fills most of the slide. Ensure that the aspect ratio is maintained.




Print the presentation.

59 Print a screen shot of slide 2 showing the animation used for the bulleted list.


• your name, Centre number and candidate number are present

• the external stylesheet is attached to the homepage



• the tables are the width of the page


• N9PEN.JPG is resized to 100 pixels wide by 300 pixels high

• the cells containing the word Adhesives have been merged

• the cells containing the word Files have been merged

• the hyperlink from the image N9TAPE.JPG opens N9TAPE.HTM in a new window called _adhesivetape

• the text Click Here links to the anchor TOP

This document consists of 7 pages.


*1280859186*




2 hours 30 minutes





Steps are numbered on the left hand side of the page. On the right hand side of the page for each step,

you will find a box which you can tick (�) when you have completed it; this will help you track your progress through the test.



If you have produced rough copies of printouts, these should be neatly crossed through to indicate that they

are not the copy to be marked.


2

© UCLES 2010 0417/02/M/J/10


1 Prepare an e-mail message to be sent to [email protected] which contains the subject line June Copy 2010


• your name



• the text Please send the files I need to work on.

Send this message.

You should receive the instructions that you need within an e-mail reply.

2 Read the reply to your message and follow the instructions.

The URL which you will need is http://www.hothouse-design.co.uk

3 Add to your e-mail address book a new contact with the name Event Organiser XXXX

Replace XXXX with your candidate number.

Use the e-mail address that you received in the e-mail reply.

4 Save and print the entry in your address book. (This may be a screenshot to show that you have added the contact to your address book.)

3


You are now going to edit a document about Power Kite Sports. �

5 Using a suitable software package, load the file J10KITES.RTF




9 Save the document with a new filename to your work area.

10 Set all the text to a sans-serif font.


12 Set the alignment of all the text to be fully justified.

13 Set the font size of all the text to 10 point.


• your candidate number and your Centre number left aligned

• the automated file name and path right aligned


• today’s date left aligned

• an automated page number right aligned



15 Make sure there is a blank line 10 points high after each paragraph and that the line spacing is consistent.

16 Insert a blank line at the start of the document and enter the heading Power Kite Sports



19 Add a subheading below the heading.

Enter the text Draft Report by: and add your name.

20 Set both the heading and subheading to a serif font.


22 Underline the heading.



25 After the subheading format the rest of the document into two equally spaced columns, with a 1 centimetre gap.

26 Delete the text A Brief history of kites and the paragraph that follows it Kites have been objects of interest … taking away any bad luck they had been born with.

4

© UCLES 2010 0417/02/M/J/10

�

27 Change the list of basic safety rules to be a bulleted list. Make sure the bulleted text does not have any blank line spaces between the items. It includes the text from:

Do not attempt to learn …

to

Never fly attached to a fixed point!

28 Insert a table with three columns and six rows after the text Here are some courses you might want to take:


Learn to use your kite safely

Course Level Duration

Fly your first kite Beginner 1 hour

Basic kite flying skills Beginner 3 hours

Basic kite surfing techniques Beginner 3 half days

Further kite surfing skills Intermediate to Advanced 3 days

30 Make sure the table fits within the column, using text wrap where needed. Make sure text is aligned to the top of the cell if text is wrapped.

31 Format only the text in the top two rows of the table to be centred and underlined.

Apply light grey shading (20 – 40%) to the top two rows of the table.

32 Merge the cells in the top row of the table so that the text is centred across the three columns.

33 Set only the outside borders of the table to a thick black line (about 3 points).

34 Place the image J10BOARD.GIF at the top of the right hand column on page one.

Align it with the top line of the text and the right margin.

5


�

35 Re-size the image to 5 centimetres high and maintain the aspect ratio.




37 Using a suitable database package, import the file J10KITES.CSV Assign the following data types to the fields.

Make Text

Model Text

Size Numeric / 1 decimal place

Price Currency / 2 decimal places

Skill level Text

Wind condition Text

Use Text


Stock item Boolean / Logical




Make Model Size Price Skill level Wind

condition Use Number Stock

item Airush Flow 15.0 898.95 Beginner Low Kite

Surf 2 Yes

Ozone Cult 6.5 309.95 Beginner Low Buggy 3 Yes

Ozone Cult 3.5 229.95 Beginner Medium Land Board

2 Yes


40 Save the data.

6

© UCLES 2010 0417/02/M/J/10

�

41 Produce a report which shows all the fields from all the data and:

• contains a new field called Value which is calculated at run-time. This field will calculate the Price multiplied by the Number in stock

• has the Value field set as currency with 2 decimal places

• shows only the records where the Skill Level is Beginner

• shows all the fields and their labels in full



• sorts the data into ascending order of Make (with Airush at the top)

• calculates the total value of these kites and o shows this total value at the bottom of the Value column o formats the total value to currency with 2 decimal places o has the label Current Value of Stock for the total value

• includes the heading Kites for Beginners at the top of the page





• show only the records where Use contains Snowkite and Stock Item is Yes

• show only the fields Make, Model, Size, Price and Wind condition, each on a separate line

• display the field name as well as the data

• are sorted into ascending order of Price

• include the heading Special offer on this kite at the top of each label

• have your name, Centre number and candidate number at the bottom of each label.

The page layout may look like this:


45 Produce an extract from all the data which:

• selects only o small kites of size 3 or less o those suitable for beginners or intermediate users o those where kite surf is not the Use

• shows only the fields Model, Size and Use

• sorts the kites from the smallest to largest size

7



© UCLES 2010 0417/02/M/J/10

�

46 Save this data in a form which can be imported into the document that you saved in step 36.

47 Import this data into your document as a table after the paragraph which ends: Here are some small kites suitable for a beginner, some of which will still be suitable as you progress to intermediate skills: Make sure that all required fields and their labels are fully visible and that there is one blank line above and below the table.

Save the document.

48 Using the contents of J10INFO.CSV produce a vertical bar chart using all the data.

Insert this chart into the end of your document after the paragraph: The following chart indicates the growing popularity of kite sports;

Label the chart with

• the title Kite Sports Popularity

• category axis labels displayed in full

• a legend to identify the years displayed

Place the graph in the document after the text Popularity of kite sports.



• tables do not overlap two columns or pages

• bulleted lists do not overlap two columns or pages





Print the document.




• with the subject line Draft for Kite article The body text of the message should include:

• your name



• the text The document you need for approval is attached.

52 Attach to your e-mail the document which you have been working on.


Send the e-mail.



*6043272089*




2 hours 30 minutes



Make sure that your Centre number, candidate number and name are written at the top of this page and are clearly visible on every printout, before it is sent to the printer. Printouts with handwritten information will not be marked.

DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.



At the end of the exam put this Question Paper and all your printouts into the Assessment Record Folder.



2

© UCLES 2010 0417/02/O/N/10


1

Prepare an e-mail message to be sent to [email protected] which contains the subject line November 2010 article The body text of the message should include:

• your name



• the text Please send the draft materials I need to work on.


2 Read the reply to your message and follow the instructions.

3 Add to your e-mail address book a new contact with the name Sports Manager XXXX Replace XXXX with your candidate number. Use the e-mail address that you received in the e-mail reply.

4 Save and print the entry in your address book. (This may be a screenshot to show that you have added the contact to your address book.)

3


You are now going to edit a document about Power Kite Sports. �

5 Using a suitable software package, load the file N10EKS.RTF







12 Set the alignment of all the text to be fully justified.

13 Set the font size of all the text to 10 point.


• your candidate number and your Centre number left aligned

• the automated file name and path right aligned Place in the footer:

• an automated page number centre aligned

• today’s date right aligned Make sure that all the alignments match the page orientation and margins. Make sure that headers and footers are displayed on each page.


16 Insert a blank line at the start of the document and enter the heading EKS Club News


18 Add the text Report by: and add your name. Place this as a subheading below the heading.

19 Set both the heading and subheading to a sans-serif font.




23 Make both the heading and subheading right aligned.

4

© UCLES 2010 0417/02/O/N/10

�

24 After the subheading, format the rest of the document into two equally spaced columns, with a 1 centimetre gap.

25 Delete the paragraph that begins: The Power Kite School courses … kite flying theory, teaching, practice and safety to be covered.

26 Change the list of basic safety rules to be a numbered list. Make sure the numbered list does not have any blank line spaces between the items. It includes the text from: Do not attempt to learn … to Never over estimate your own ability.

27 Insert a table with five columns and five rows after the text Here are some courses we have on offer:

Enter the following data into the table:

Learn to use your kite safely

Course Level Duration Cost Group

Power kite taster Beginner 1 hour 15.00 Max 4

Basic driving techniques Intermediate 1 day 75.00 Max 4

Advanced flying or driving skills Advanced 3 hours 80.00 1 to 1

28

29 Make sure the table fits within the column, using text wrap where needed. Make sure text is aligned to the top of the cell if text is wrapped.

30 Format only the text in the top two rows of the table to be centred and underlined. Apply light grey shading (20 – 40%) to the top two rows of the table.

31 Merge the cells in the top row of the table so that the text is centred across the five columns.

32 Set all gridlines to be visible with lines 2 to 2.5 points wide.

5


�

33 Place the image N10SURF.GIF at the beginning of the paragraph that starts Our Extreme Sports Centre gives you… Align the image with the top line of the paragraph and the left margin. Make sure the text wraps to the right and below the image. Re-size the image to 3 centimetres high and maintain the aspect ratio. It may look like this:


You are going to prepare some reports for the company

35 Using a suitable database package, import the file N10EKS.CSV Assign the following data types to the fields. Make Text Model Text Size Numeric / 1 decimal place Price Currency / 2 decimal places Skill level Text Wind condition Text Use Text Number Numeric / Integer Stock item Boolean / Logical Make sure that you use these field names. You may add another field as a primary key field if your software requires this.

Save a screen shot showing the field names and data types used. Print a copy of this screen shot. Make sure that your name, Centre number and candidate number are included on this printout.


Make Model Size Price Skill level Wind condition

Use Number Stock item

Airush Vapour 16 999 Beginner

Low Kite Surf 1 Yes

Best Nemesis 12 979 Beginner

Medium Kite Surf 1 Yes

Airush Flow 5 699 Beginner High Kite Surf 1 Yes


37 Save the data.

6

© UCLES 2010 0417/02/O/N/10

�


• contains a new field called Order which is calculated at run-time. This field will calculate the Price multiplied by 3

• has the Order field set as currency with 2 decimal places

• shows only the records where Number is less than 2 and Stock item is Yes




• sorts the data into ascending order of Make (with Airush at the top)

• calculates the total value of kites to be ordered and o shows this total value at the bottom of the Order column o formats this total value to currency with no decimal places o has the label Total order value for the total value

• includes the heading Kites we need to restock at the top of the page

• has your name, Centre number and candidate number on the left footer of each page.




• show only the records where Use contains Kite Surf, the Stock item field is Yes and the Skill level is not Beginner

• show only the fields Make, Model, Size , Price and Wind condition, each on a separate line


• are sorted into ascending order of Size

• include the heading Special offer for kite surfers at the top of each label


The page layout may look like this



• selects only o small kites of less than size 3 o those suitable for beginners

• shows only the fields Make, Model, Size and Price

• sorts the kites into ascending order of price.

7

© UCLES 2010 0417/02/O/N/10

�


44 Import this data into your document as a table after the paragraph which ends: Here are some small kites suitable for a beginner, some of which will still be suitable as you progress to intermediate skills: Make sure that all required fields and their labels are fully visible and that there is one blank line above and below the table.

45 Search the website address specified in the body of the e-mail from step 2 for a file that contains information on EKS adventure trips. Save this file in your work area.

46 Insert this text, as a table, into your document after the line Here are details of planned trips:

47 Format the table to match that of the table you created in steps 27 to 32.






49 Save the document. Print the document.




• with the subject line Draft club news article The body text of the message should include:

• your name



• the text Here is the draft news letter you asked me to prepare.

51 Attach to your e-mail the document you saved in step 49.


Write today’s date in the box below. Date

8



© UCLES 2010 0417/02/O/N/10

BLANK PAGE


IB10 06_0417_03/RP © UCLES 2010 [Turn over

*5230304889*




2 hours 30 minutes










2

© UCLES 2010 0417/03/M/J/10

You work for a company called Hothouse Design. You are going to create a new website for a client called The Relaxing Holiday Company. This website must open in any browser with any screen resolution. The homepage will have three separate tables and look like this:

�

1 Download the following files from http://www.hothouse-design.co.uk/2010XJune to your own work area: JXBOTTOM.HTM JXBUBBLE.JPG JXDEST.CSV JXFOOTER.JPG JXHARBOUR.JPG JXIMG1.JPG JXIMG2.JPG JXIMG3.JPG JXIMG4.JPG JXIMG5.JPG JXIMG6.JPG JXPRES.RTF JXSEA.HTM JXSHEET.CSV JXSTYLES1.CSS JXSTYLES2.CSS JXTEXT.TXT JXTITLE.JPG JXTOP.HTM

2 Using a suitable software package, create a new webpage called JXRHC.HTM Attach the stylesheet JXSTYLES1.CSS to this webpage.

3


�

3 Create the top table using the contents of JXTOP.HTM

4 Set the table width to 100% of the width of the window.

5 At the top of the page create an anchor called START

6 Replace the text candidate name, Centre number, candidate number with your name, Centre number and candidate number.

7 Create the middle table with 3 rows and 2 columns as shown in the diagram on the previous page.

8 Set the table width of the middle table to 90% of the width of the window.

9 Align the middle table with the centre of the window, as shown in the diagram.

10 Place the image JXHARBOUR.JPG in the left cell of the middle table.

11 Use the contents of the file JXTEXT.TXT to place the following text, as style h3, in the middle table:

• Place the text We offer holidays to suit your every need. We can often make dreams come true. in the top right cell.

• Place the text Let us arrange your holiday for you. We will collect you from your home and offer the best service of any holiday company in the world. in the middle right cell.

• Place the text Combine our service with superb value for money. Contact us with your requirements and we are sure that we will not disappoint you. in the bottom right cell.

Make sure that the styles which are in the stylesheet are not over-ridden.

12 Create the bottom table using the contents of JXBOTTOM.HTM

13 Set the table width of the bottom table to 100% of the width of the window.

14 Replace the text Place anchor here with an anchor called SNOWZONE This anchor must not be visible on the page.

15 Create a hyperlink from the word Snow in the top table to the anchor that you have just created.

16 Make only the words Click Here a hyperlink to the anchor called START

17 Select the most appropriate image from those obtained in step 1 and use this to replace the word Sun in the bottom table.

18 Select the most appropriate image from those obtained in step 1 and use this to replace the word Sea in the bottom table.

19 Select the most appropriate image from those obtained in step 1 and use this to replace the word Sand in the bottom table.

20 Select the most appropriate image from those obtained in step 1 and use this to replace the words Contact us in the bottom table.

21 Set the width of each of the images placed in steps 17 to 20 to 160 pixels wide and maintain the aspect ratio.

22 Create a hyperlink from the image placed in step 18 to point to the file JXSEA.HTM which should open in a new window called _sea

23 Create a hyperlink from the image placed in step 20 to send an e-mail to [email protected]

4

© UCLES 2010 0417/03/M/J/10

�

24 Save the webpage as JXRHC1.HTM Print a copy of the HTML source.

25 Attach the stylesheet JXSTYLES2.CSS to this webpage.

26 Save the webpage as JXRHC2.HTM Open this page in your web browser. Print screenshot evidence of this page. You may use more than one printout to make sure that the entire page is visible.

27 Open the webpage JXSEA.HTM

28 Attach the stylesheet JXSTYLES2.CSS to this webpage.

29 Make the text Home a link to JXRHC2.HTM

30 Save the webpage.

You are going to create a short presentation for the manager of The Relaxing Holiday Company about the website. 31 Import the file JXPRES.RTF placing the text as slides in your presentation

software. Remove any blank slides. (This should provide four slides, each containing a title and some bullet points.)

Save the presentation.


• a white background

• your Centre number, candidate number and name in a 12 point black serif font in the top right corner

• a clipart image of the sun as a logo in the bottom right corner

• slide numbers in the bottom left corner.

33 Insert a new slide before slide 1. Use a layout with a title and subtitle for the new slide.

34 Enter the text New website for as a subtitle for the slide.

Enter the text The Relaxing Holiday Company as the title for the slide. Move this title so that it is below the subtitle.

35 Explain why the background image in JXSTYLES1.CSS does not work. Give your answer by replacing the text Answer 1 here on slide 4.

36 On slide 4 replace the text Answer 2 here with only the html code in the stylesheet JXSTYLES1.CSS that makes the background colour of the page visible.

37 The stylesheet should have set h1 and h2 to white and h3 to yellow. Explain why the text for styles h1 and h2 is not white and h3 is not yellow. Give your answer by replacing the text Answer 3 here.

38 Describe what cell padding in html coding is. Give your answer by replacing the text Answer 4 here on slide 5.

39 Describe what cell spacing in html coding is. Give your answer by replacing the text Answer 5 here on slide 5.

40 On all slides make sure that no objects overlap any of the master slide items.

41 Save the presentation using a new filename. Print the presentation with two slides on each page.

5


Your manager has asked you to manipulate a spreadsheet about some holiday bookings.

�

42 Using a suitable software package, load the file JXSHEET.CSV

43 Place your name, candidate number and Centre number in the footer.

44 In the Destination column use a lookup function to show the destination name. Use the Code column for the lookup value and the file JXDEST.CSV for the array. This function must include both absolute and relative referencing and must not use a named range.

Replicate this function so that the destination name is shown for each of the codes.

45 In cell C2 use a function to count the number of trips to the destination where the value in the Dcode column matches the contents of cell B2. This function must include both absolute and relative referencing and must not use a named range. Do not count any entries in rows 1 to 24.

Replicate this function into cells C3 to C8 to calculate the number of trips booked to each of the other destinations.

46 In cell C11 use a function to add the total number of days (using the Duration column) for holidays starting in the month of January. This function must include both absolute and relative referencing and must not use a named range.

Replicate this function into cells C12 to C22 to calculate the total number of days booked for the other months in 2010.


48 Save the data model and print a copy of the cells A1 to C22 only, showing the formulae used. Make sure that the contents of all cells in this range are visible and that the printout fits on a single page wide.

Make sure that your name, candidate number and Centre number are printed in the footer of the page.

49 Format only the cells in rows 1, 10 and 24 to be centre aligned.

50 Format only the cells in rows 1, 10 and 24 so that they are bold and italic.


52 Save the data model and print all of the sheet showing the values. Make sure that the contents of all cells are visible and that the printout is one page wide.



54 Hide columns A, B and C.

55 Interrogate the data, to find all the bookings where the country is Egypt and the discount is yes.

Print this data.


6



© UCLES 2010 0417/03/M/J/10

After the examination time – on the html printouts of your webpage Highlight those portions of the code which show that:


• the external style sheet is attached to the webpage

• the top and bottom tables have a width of 100%

• the middle table has a width of 90%

• the anchor Start has been placed

• the anchor Snowzone has been placed

• the hyperlink from the text ‘Snow’ links to the anchor ‘Snowzone’

• the hyperlink from the text ‘Click here’ links to the anchor ‘Start’

• the hyperlink from the sea image opens JXSEA.HTM in a new window called _sea

• the hyperlink from the ‘Contact us’ image sends an e-mail to [email protected]



*9004164602*




2 hours 30 minutes










2

© UCLES 2010 0417/03/O/N/10

�

1 Create a new word processed document. You will use this to show screen shots of how you have completed the tasks.

2 Place your name, Centre number and candidate number in the header of this document.

Save this with the filename Evidence in your work area.

You work for a company called Hothouse Design. You are going to manipulate a spreadsheet about some holiday bookings for a client called The Relaxing Holiday Company.

3 Using a suitable software package, load the file NXSHEET.CSV

4 Place your name, candidate number and Centre number in the header.

5 In the Destination column use a lookup function to show the destination name in full. Use the Code column for the lookup value and the file NXDEST.CSV for the array. This function must include both absolute and relative referencing and must not use a named range.

Replicate this function so that the destination name is shown in full for each of the codes.

6 Create a named range for the cells D25 to D98 inclusive. Call this range DC

Take a screenshot to show this named range includes these cells. Include this screenshot in the document created in step 1.

7 Create a named range for the cells E25 to E98 inclusive. Call this range DI


8 Create a named range for the cells F25 to F98 inclusive. Call this range DU


9 In cell C2 use a function to count the number of trips to the destination where the value in the Dcode column matches the contents of cell B2. This function must use the correct named range.

Replicate this function into cells C3 to C8 to calculate the number of trips booked to each of the other destinations.

10 In cell D2 use a function to add the total number of days (using the Duration column) booked for this destination. This function must use the correct named ranges.

Replicate this function into cells D3 to D8 to calculate the total number of days booked for the other destinations.

11 In cell E2 use a formula to calculate the average duration of the holidays booked to this destination. Use the values in cells C2 and D2 to help you.

Round this value to a whole number.

Replicate this formula into cells E3 to E8.


3


�

13 Save the data model and print a copy of cells A1 to E8 only, showing the formulae used. Make sure that the contents of all these cells are visible and that the printout fits on a single page wide.


14 For each month of the year, calculate the average duration of holidays starting in that month. You may use rows 10 to 22 to help you.

Save the data model.

Use this data to create a vertical bar chart.

15 Label this chart with the title Average holiday duration per month

16 Make sure that all category axis labels are fully visible and there is no legend.

17 Save this chart in a format that can be imported into a presentation authoring package.

18 Print a copy of this chart.

Make sure that your name, candidate number and Centre number are printed with this chart.

19 Using the spreadsheet saved in step 14, format only the cells in rows 1 and 24 to be right aligned.

20 Format only the cells in rows 1 and 24 so that they are underlined and italic.



23 Interrogate the data to find all the items where the Dcode is CUB or USA and the discount is Y.

Print this data, showing the values and labels in full.


4

© UCLES 2010 0417/03/O/N/10

�

You are going to edit a webpage and manipulate the objects within it.

24 Download the following files to your own work area: NXBACK1.JPG NXBOARD1.JPG NXFOOTER.JPG NXIMG1.JPG NXIMG2.JPG NXIMG3.JPG NXIMG4.JPG NXIMG5.JPG NXIMG6.JPG NXLIFT.JPG NXSNOW.HTM NXSTYLE1.CSS NXSTYLE2.CSS NXSTYLE3.CSS NXTITLE.JPG

25 Open the image NXBACK1.JPG in a suitable application. This will be manipulated to create the background image to be used in the stylesheet.

26 Resize the image so that it is 1024 pixels wide. Maintain the aspect ratio of the image. Show a screenshot of this in the document you called Evidence in step 1.

Save this image as NXBACK2.JPG

27 Reduce the image resolution, if necessary, to ensure that the stored image is no larger than 250kb.

Save the image as NXBACK3.JPG

Show screenshot evidence of the file size of these images.

28 Open the image NXBOARD1.JPG in a suitable application. This will be manipulated before being placed on the page.

29 Crop off the right side of the image so that it is 400 pixels wide and 1000 pixels high. Save this image as NXBOARD2.JPG

Show evidence of this in the document you called Evidence in step 1.

30 Using a suitable software package, open the file NXSNOW.HTM

31 Replace the text Candidate name, centre number, candidate number with your name, Centre number and candidate number.

32 Change the html code so that the image NXBOARD2.JPG is 150 pixels wide, maintaining its aspect ratio.


34 Make only the words Click Here a hyperlink to the anchor called TOP

35 Select the most appropriate images from the ones you downloaded in step 24 and use this to replace the words Ski holidays in the bottom table.

5


�

36 Select the most appropriate image from the ones you downloaded in step 24 and use this to replace the words Snowboard holidays in the bottom table.

37 Select the most appropriate images from the ones you downloaded in step 24 and use this to replace the words Learn to ski in the bottom table.

38 Make sure that each of the images placed in steps 35 to 37 are 160 pixels wide and maintain their aspect ratio.

39 Replace the words Contact us with the image NXIMG2.JPG

40 Resize the image to 160 pixels wide and 160 pixels high.

41 Create a hyperlink from the image NXFOOTER.JPG to point to the website, which should open in a new window called _hosting

42 There are 3 stylesheets available for you to use. The first has been attached to the webpage already. Select the most appropriate stylesheet for this website. Note down your reasons for selecting this stylesheet as you will need these reasons later.

43 Save the webpage as NXSNOW1.HTM


Open this page in your web browser. Print screenshot evidence of this page.

You may use more than one printout to make sure that the entire page is visible.

You are going to create a short presentation about your work.

44 Import the file NXPRES.RTF and place the text as slides in your presentation software.

Remove any blank slides.

(This should provide four slides, each containing a title and some bullet points.)

45 Move slide 4 so that it becomes slide 1.

46 Remove the bullet from the first line of the bulleted list on the first slide.

47 Remove the bullet from the first line of the bulleted list on the third slide.

6

© UCLES 2010 0417/03/O/N/10

�

48 The master slide must have a white background with one vertical yellow stripe, two horizontal yellow stripes and one diagonal yellow stripe. Each stripe should be about 6 points wide. It should look like this:

(If you do not have a colour printer, choose a shade of yellow which makes the lines clearly visible when printed in greyscale.)

49 Include an automated slide number in the bottom right of the footer of the master slide. Make sure that it does not overlap any of the lines added in step 48.

50 Place a clipart image of a snowflake, skier or snowboarder as a logo in the bottom left corner of the master slide.

The logo must be resized so that it will not overlap the diagonal line added in step 48.

1

51 Enter your name, Centre number and candidate number, centre aligned below the bottom yellow line of the master slide. Use a black, 18 point, serif font. It should look like this:

1

7


�

52 Enter the text The Relaxing Holiday Company as a title above the yellow line, in the top left corner of the master slide. Use a black, 28 point, serif font. It should look like this:

1

53 Make sure that on all slides no objects overlap any of the master slide items.

54 On slide 2 replace the text Answer 1 here with the filename of the most appropriate stylesheet for the website, chosen in step 42.

55 On slide 2, place the image NXLIFT.JPG in the bottom right corner.

Resize this image so that it fills half of the available vertical space. Maintain its aspect ratio.

Make sure that this image does not overlap any other items on the page. It should look like this:

1

56 On slide 3 replace the text Reason 1 here and Reason 2 here with brief explanations of why you think this is the most appropriate stylesheet.

(Use your notes from step 42 to help you.)

57 On slide 4 add the chart created in steps 14 to 18.

Make sure that these objects do not overlap any of the master slide items.


Print the presentation with two slides on each page.

59 Save and print the document you called Evidence in step 1.

8



© UCLES 2010 0417/03/O/N/10



• the external style sheet is attached to the webpage

• the image NXBOARD2.JPG has a width of 150 pixels and has its aspect ratio maintained


• the hyperlink from NXFOOTER.JPG opens the Hothouse website in a new window called _hosting

• the hyperlink from the text ‘Click Here’ links to the anchor ‘TOP’ Write today’s date in the box below. Date



*1943050649*




2 hours 30 minutes










2

© UCLES 2011 0417/21/M/J/11

You work for a company called Hothouse Design. You are going to perform some clerical tasks for this company.

�

1 Open the file JX1EVIDENCE.RTF

Make sure that your name, Centre number and candidate number will appear on every page of this document.

Save this evidence document in your work area as JX1EVIDENCE followed by your candidate number. For example: JX1EVIDENCE9999

You will need this file later.

2 Add [email protected] to your email contacts/address book with the name Project Manager

Show evidence of this in your evidence document. (This may be a screenshot.)

You will send a message to this address later.

You are now going to edit a document about the development of a new port.

3 Using a suitable software package, load the file JX1PORT21.RTF



6 Set all margins to 2 centimetres.

7 Save the document, with a new name, in your work area.


• your name and candidate number left aligned

• your Centre number right aligned


• the automated file name left aligned

• today’s date right aligned

Make sure that all the alignments match the page margins.


9 Insert a blank line at the start of the document and enter the title Dock facilities at Port Pepard

10 Make the title centre aligned.

11 Set the font size of the title to 24 point.

12 Below the title, add a subtitle:

Report by: and add your name.

13 Set the title and subtitle to a sans-serif font.

14 Set the font size of the subtitle to 18 point.

3


�

15 Make only the subtitle italic and underlined.

16 Make only the subtitle right aligned.

17 After the subtitle format the rest of the document as body text into two equally spaced columns, with a 1 centimetre gap.

18 Set all the body text to a serif font.

19 Set all the body text to 1.5 line spacing.

20 Set the alignment of all the body text to be fully justified.

21 Set the font size of all the body text to 10 point.

22 Make sure there is a blank line after each paragraph of the body text and that this line spacing is consistent.

23 In the left column, before the first paragraph of the document, enter the subheading:

A major regional port

24 Identify the subheadings in the document and make them all italic, sans-serif and 12 point. Make sure there is one line space below each subheading.

25 Find the table in JX1EXPORT21.RTF and insert it at the end of the document.

26 Make sure the table fits within the column width. The font should match the body text of the document.

27 Merge the cells in the top row of the table across the five columns.

Format only this row to be centre aligned and underlined.

28 Apply a light grey (20 – 40%) shading to only the top two rows of the table.

29 Set all borders of the table to be visible when printed.

4

© UCLES 2011 0417/21/M/J/11

�

30 Find an image of a harbour, port or boat.

Re-size the image to a height of 3 cm and maintain the aspect ratio.

Place this image:

• on the first page

• below the subheading A major regional port

• aligned with the top of the first paragraph

• aligned to the left margin

Make sure the text wraps round the image.









Print the document.

5


You are now going to create a short presentation about the port.

�


• A plain white background

• the image JX1PORT21.JPG placed in the top right corner. The height of the image should be 4 cm and the aspect ratio should be maintained

• your Centre number, candidate number and name in a 12 point black serif font in the bottom right corner

• automatic slide numbers in the bottom left corner

• a horizontal black line, 3 points wide, across the slide below the image

• the text Port Pepard dock facilities in a black 36 point serif font above the line and to the left of the image.

No master slide elements, text or images should overlap each other on any slides.

Apply all master slide elements to all slides.

34 Import the file JX1PRES21.RTF placing the text as slides in your presentation software.


(This should provide five slides, each containing a title and some bullet points.)


36 Enter the text New port facilities as the title for the slide.

Enter the text Car export docks reviewed as a subtitle for the slide.

37 Move slide 5 so that it now becomes slide 3.

38 Create a vertical bar chart using the table in JX1EXPORT21.RTF to compare the planned exports to the actual exports.

(You may need to take the data into another package.)

39 Label the chart with

• the title Car export volumes


• axis titles as Number of cars and Year

40 Place the chart on the last slide to the right of the bullet points.

41 Save the presentation.

Print all the slides with six slides to the page.

42 Print only the last slide full size on a single page.

6

© UCLES 2011 0417/21/M/J/11

You are now going to prepare some reports for the company.

�

43 Using a suitable database package, import the file JX1CARS21.CSV

Use the following field names and data types:

VIN Text this is the unique number for each car produced

Model Text this is the model of the car Power Text this is the power source for the car, eg petrol or

diesel Engine Size Text this is the cubic capacity of the engine where

relevant Cost Price Currency this is in Euros and two decimal places Colour Text this is the paint colour of the car Port Text this is the port to which the car will be exported Country Text this is the country in which that port is located Distributor Text this is the company who import and sell cars in

that country Dispatched Boolean/Logical records whether a car has been sent out from

the port or not

44 Save a screen shot showing the field names and data types used. Insert a copy of this screen shot into the evidence document.


VIN

Mo

de

l

Po

we

r

En

gin

e S

ize

Co

st P

rice

Co

lou

r

Po

rt

Co

un

try

Dis

trib

uto

r

Dis

pa

tch

ed

376C15423002 MicroZed D 1200 1100 Blue Brest France FMD SA No

376C15423010 MicroSE H 900 1200 Red Brest France FMD SA No

377C15423010 Micro G 600 850 Red Brest France FMD SA No


46 Save the data.

7


�


• contains a new field called Delivered Price which is calculated at run-time. This field will calculate the Cost Price of the car plus a delivery charge of 200 Euros

• has the Delivered Price field in Euros with 2 decimal places

• shows only the records where the Country is France and the cars have not been dispatched

• shows only the fields VIN, Model, Power, Engine Size, Cost Price, Colour, Port, Distributor and Delivered Price with their labels in full



• sorts the data into ascending order of VIN

• calculates the total number of cars in this selection and places it at the bottom of the report

• has a label to the left of this number Total cars for France

• includes the heading Dispatch manifest (port: Brest) at the top of the page




• are arranged in two columns

• show only the records where VIN begins with 37, the Country field is Spain and the Power field is E

• show only the fields VIN, Model, Port and Distributor each on a separate line


• include the heading Warning Check charge voltage before delivery

in a larger font at the top of each label




8



© UCLES 2011 0417/21/M/J/11

�

51 Prepare an email message:


• copied to the Project Manager (from your address book)

• with the subject line Port facilities report


• your name



• the text: The draft report for your approval is attached.

52 Attach to your email the document which you saved at step 32.

53 Take a screenshot of this email, showing clearly that the attachment is present and place it in the evidence document.

Send the email.

54 Save and print the evidence document.




*1946851909*




2 hours 30 minutes










2

© UCLES 2011 0417/22/M/J/11


�

1 Open the file J11EVIDENCE.RTF


Save this evidence document in your work area as J11EVIDENCE followed by your candidate number. For example: J11EVIDENCE9999



2 Using a suitable software package, load the file J11PORT22.RTF



5 Set all the margins to 3 centimetres.



• your Centre number left aligned

• your name centre aligned

• your candidate number right aligned



• the automated file name right aligned



8 Set all the body text to a serif font.

9 Set all the body text to single line spacing.

10 Set the alignment of all the body text to be fully justified with a first line indent of one centimetre.

11 Set all the body text size to 12 point.

12 Make sure there is a blank line after each paragraph and that this line spacing is consistent.

13 Insert a blank line at the start of the document and enter the title Export facilities at Port Pepard

14 Make this title centre aligned.

3


�


16 Underline the title.


New developments reported by: and add your name.

18 Set both the title and subtitle to a sans-serif font.


20 Make the subtitle italic.

21 Make the subtitle centre aligned.

22 After the subtitle format the rest of the document into two equally spaced columns, with a 2 centimetre gap.


Location of Port Pepard

24 Identify the subheadings in the document and make them all italic, sans serif, 12 point and centre aligned. Make sure there is consistent line spacing below the subheadings (one line space).

25 Move the paragraph that starts One of the unique features of Port Pepard … to become the second paragraph.

26 Delete the subheading History and the following two paragraphs.

27 Insert a table with four columns and six rows after the text … peak tidal conditions.


Level Tide Code Height

High High Water Spring Tides HHWS +292 cm

Mean High High Water MHHW +219 cm

Mean Sea Level MSL +76 cm

Mean Low Low Water MLLW -50 cm

Low Low Water Spring Tides LLWS -101 cm

Note: All levels are with

reference to Chart Datum

29 Format only the text in the top row of the table to be centred and underlined.

30 Merge the cells in the bottom row of the table so that the text is centred across the four columns. Apply a light grey (20 – 40%) shading to the top and bottom rows of the table.

4

© UCLES 2011 0417/22/M/J/11

�

31 Make sure that:

• the font matches the body text but in 10 point size

• the table fits within the column width (Apply text wrap if needed to do this.)

• no words are split over lines

• the line spacing matches the body text of the document.

32 Make sure that the text is centre aligned vertically within each cell.

33 Set all the borders of the table to be visible when printed.

34 Use the information in the Tide and Height columns of the table to produce a vertical bar chart.


You will need to convert the Height values into numerical data.


• the title Relative height of tides


• axis titles as Centimetres and Tide

Do not display a legend.

36 Place this chart immediately after the table. Resize the chart to fit within the column width without distorting it. Make sure all labels are fully visible.

37 Find an image of a harbour, port or boat with landscape orientation.

Place this image immediately after the paragraph that ends …dedicated rail sidings.

38

Re-size the image to fill the column width and maintain the aspect ratio.

Make sure the text wraps above and below the image.


39 Spell-check and proof read the document.






40 Save the document

Print the document.

5



�

41 Using a suitable database package, import the file J11CARS22.CSV


VIN Text this is the unique number for each car produced Model Text this is the model of the car Fuel Numeric/Integer this is a number used to represent the power

source for the car, eg 1=petrol Engine Size Numeric/Integer this is the size of the engine where relevant Cost Price Currency this is in Euros and two decimal places Colour Text this is the paint colour of the car Port Text this is the port to which the car will be exported Country Text this is the country in which that port is located Distributor Text this is the company who import and sell cars

in that country Dispatched Boolean/Logical records whether a car has been sent out from

the port or not



VIN

Mo

de

l

Fu

el

En

gin

e S

ize

Co

st P

rice

Co

lou

r

Po

rt

Co

un

try

Dis

trib

uto

r

Dis

pa

tch

ed

377C15423018 Micro 1 600 850 Red Harwich UK UKMI PLC No

377C15423019 MicroZed 2 1200 1100 Gold Harwich UK UKMI PLC No

377C15423020 MicroSE 3 900 1200 Gold Harwich UK UKMI PLC No


44 Save the data.

6

© UCLES 2011 0417/22/M/J/11

�


• has the heading Latest UK Delivery Manifest

• contains a new field called Delivered Price which is calculated at run-time. This field will calculate the Cost Price plus a delivery charge of 10% of the Cost Price


• shows only the records where the Country is UK and the cars have not been dispatched.

• shows only the fields VIN, Model, Fuel, Engine Size, Cost Price, Colour, Port, Distributor and Delivered Price with their labels in full



• sorts the data into ascending order of Model (with Micro at the top)




• has the heading Voltage must be checked before delivery

• shows only the records where VIN contains 365C or 366C, Fuel is 4 and the Dispatched field is No

• are sorted into ascending order of Port and then by VIN in ascending order

• shows only the fields VIN, Model, Colour, Port, Distributor and Dispatched in this order

• shows all data and labels in full

• counts the number of cars to be checked and places this number on the right at the bottom of the report with the label Number of cars to check

• has your name, Centre number and candidate number at the bottom of the report.


49 Export this report as a webpage.

(You may need to use other packages to help you.)

Take a screenshot of this webpage as viewed in your browser and place it in the evidence document.

50 Add [email protected] to your email contacts/address book with the name Development Manager




• copied to the Development Manager (from your address book)



• your name



• the text: The draft report for your approval is attached.


7

© UCLES 2011 0417/22/M/J/11

�


Send the email.

54 Delete from your work area for this examination the original files you received. Your work area should now only contain files you have worked on during your exam.

55 Take a screenshot to show the files that are in your work area, showing the file names and file types. Paste this screenshot into the evidence document.





*7173082561*




2 hours 30 minutes










2

© UCLES 2011 0417/02/O/N/11


�

1 Open the file NX1EVIDENCE.RTF


Save this evidence document in your work area as NX1EVIDENCE followed by your candidate number. For example: NX1EVIDENCE9999


2 Add Mr Rashid Paul, the Export Manager, to your email contacts / address book.

His contact details are:

Title: Export Manager

Address: [email protected]


You will send a message to this address later.


3 Using a suitable software package, load the file NX1PORT02.RTF



6 Set all margins to 1 centimetre.




• your candidate number centre aligned

• your Centre number right aligned



• the automated file name right aligned



9 Insert a blank line at the start of the document and enter the title Developments at Port Pepard

10 Make the title right aligned.




3


�

13 Set the title and subtitle to a serif font.


15 Make only the subtitle italic and underlined.

16 Make the subtitle right aligned.

17 After the subtitle format the rest of the document as body text into two equally spaced columns, with a 2 centimetre gap.

18 Set all the body text to a sans-serif font.

19 Set all the body text to single line spacing.

20 Set the alignment of all the body text to be fully justified.

21 Set the font size of all the body text to 12 point.

22 Make sure there is a blank line after each paragraph of the body text and that this line spacing is consistent.


An important regional port

24 Identify the subheadings in the document and make them all italic, sans-serif and 14 point. Make sure there is one line space below each subheading.

25 Find the table in NX1EXPORT02.RTF and insert it at the end of the document.

26 Make sure the table fits within the column width. The font should match the body text of the document.

27 Merge the cells in the top row of the table across the five columns.

Format only this row to be centre aligned and underlined.

28 Set all borders of the table to be visible when printed.

29 Set only the outside border of the table to be a thick (3 point) line.

4

© UCLES 2011 0417/02/O/N/11

�

30 Find an image of a harbour, port or boat.

Re-size the image to a height of 3 cm and maintain the aspect ratio.

Place this image:


• below the subheading An important regional port












Print the document.

5


You are now going to create a short presentation about the port.

�


• A plain white background

• the image NX1PORT02.JPG placed in the top left corner. The height of the image should be 4 cm and the aspect ratio should be maintained


• automatic slide numbers in the bottom centre of the slide

• a horizontal line, 3 points wide, across the slide below the image

• the text Port Pepard Docks in a black 48 point serif font above the line and aligned to the right.

No master slide elements, text or images should overlap each other on any slides.


34 Import the file NX1PRES02.RTF placing the text as slides in your presentation software.


(This should provide five slides, each containing a title and some bullet points.)


36 Enter the text New dock for car exports as the title for the slide.

Enter the text Review of car movements as a subtitle for the slide.


38 Create a vertical bar chart using the table in NX1EXPORT02.RTF to compare the planned exports to the actual exports.



• the title Car export volumes


• axis titles as Number of cars and Year

40 Place the chart on the last slide to the left of the bullet points.


Print all the slides with six slides to the page.

42 Print only the last slide full size on a single page.

6

© UCLES 2011 0417/02/O/N/11


�

43 Using a suitable database package, import the file NX1CARS02.CSV


VIN Text this is the unique number for each car produced

Model Text this is the model of the car Power Text this is the power source for the car, eg petrol or

diesel Engine Size Text this is the cubic capacity of the engine where

relevant Cost Price Currency this is in Euros and two decimal places Colour Text this is the paint colour of the car Port Text this is the port to which the car will be exported Country Text this is the country in which that port is located Distributor Text this is the company who import and sell cars in

that country Dispatched Boolean/Logical records whether a car has been sent out from

the port or not



VIN

Mo

de

l

Po

we

r

En

gin

e S

ize

Co

st P

rice

Co

lou

r

Po

rt

Co

un

try

Dis

trib

uto

r

Dis

pa

tch

ed

376C15423002 MicroZed D 1200 11000 Blue Hamburg Germany BMD AG No

376C15423010 MicroSE H 900 12000 Red Hamburg Germany BMD AG No

377C15423010 Micro G 600 8500 Red Hamburg Germany BMD AG No


46 Save the data.

7


�


• contains a new field called Delivered Price which is calculated at run-time. This field will calculate the Cost Price of the car plus a delivery charge of 300 Euros


• shows only the records where the Country is Germany and the cars have not been dispatched

• shows only the fields VIN, Model, Power, Engine Size, Cost Price, Colour, Port, Distributor and Delivered Price with their labels in full




• calculates the total number of cars in this selection and places it at the bottom of the report

• has a label to the left of this number Total cars for Germany

• includes the heading Dispatch manifest (port: Hamburg) at the top of the page




• are arranged in two columns

• show only the records where VIN begins with 37, the Country field is Spain and the Power field is E

• show only the fields VIN, Model, Port and Distributor each on a separate line


• include the heading Attention! Check charge voltage before delivery

in a larger font at the top of each label




8



© UCLES 2011 0417/02/O/N/11

�



• copied to the Export Manager (from your address book)



• your name



• the text: You will find the draft report attached.



Send the email.



This document consists of 6 printed pages and 2 blank pages.


*7199891253*




2 hours 30 minutes










2

© UCLES 2011 0417/31/M/J/11

�

1 Create a new word processed document. Save this with the filename EVIDENCE


You work for a company called RockICT. You are going to manipulate a spreadsheet about the performance of athletes in the Shot Putt as they prepare for the 2012 Olympic games.

3 Using a suitable software package, load the file J1GAMES.CSV


Place the automated file name and file path in the footer.

5 Search the internet to find the current Olympic record holders for the men’s and women’s Shot Putt.

For each of these records, find the:

• athlete’s name

• country that they represented

• distance thrown in metres to 2 decimal places

• year the record was set

• name of the city hosting the Olympic games in that year.

Place this information in cells B3 to F4 of the spreadsheet.

6 Print only cells A1 to F4. Make sure that your name, Centre number and candidate number are printed in the header of the page.

7 In cell A8 use a lookup function to show the country name in full. Use the Code column for the lookup value and the file J1COUNTRY.CSV for the array. This function must include both absolute and relative referencing and must not use a named range.

Replicate this function so that the country name is shown in full for each athlete.

8 In cell K8 use a function to select and display the longest of the 6 throws made by the athlete.

Replicate this function so that the best throw is shown for each athlete.

Because athletes sometimes miss a throw or throw outside the area, this is recorded in the spreadsheet as a no throw using the letters NT.

9 In cell L8 use a function to add the distances of all the throws for this athlete. Ensure that the function does not include the distance if it is recorded as NT (a no throw).

Replicate this function so that the total distance thrown is shown for each athlete.

10 In cell M8 use a function to count the number of throws that were NOT recorded as NT.

Replicate this function so that the number of throws that were NOT recorded as NT is shown for each athlete.

3


�

11 In cell N8 calculate the average throw length for only the throws where a distance was recorded. Use the contents of cells L8 and M8 to help you.

Round this value to 1 decimal place.

Replicate this function so that the average throw length is shown for each athlete.

12 In cell O8 use a formula to display the word Yes if the athlete’s longest throw breaks the Olympic record or display the word No if it does not. (Remember that there are two records, one for men and one for women.)

Replicate this formula so that this is automatically displayed for each athlete.

13 Right align all cells in columns D to O inclusive.


15 Save the data model with the filename ATHLETES

16 Hide columns B to J.

17 Print the spreadsheet showing the formulae used. Make sure that the contents of all these cells are visible and that the printout fits on two pages wide. Make sure that the row and column headings are visible when printed.


18 Make all data in columns A to O fully visible.

19 Select only the athletes where the Country is Great Britain.

Use the athletes’ names and the average distance that each of these athletes throws the shot to create a vertical bar chart.

20 Label this chart with the title Average distance for British athletes

21 Make sure that category axis labels show the names of the athletes and these are fully visible.

22 Print this chart. Save this using the filename CHART


23 Open the spreadsheet saved in step 15.

24 Hide columns L and M.

25 Format only the cells in rows 6 and 7 so that they are bold, italic and centre aligned.

26 Interrogate the data to find all the athletes who have broken the current Olympic record.

27 Sort this data into descending order of Gender, then into descending order on the Best throw column, showing the values and labels in full (except columns L and M).

28 Print this data showing the values.


4

© UCLES 2011 0417/31/M/J/11


�

29 Create a new folder called WEBSITE in your work area.

Download the following files from http://www.RockICT.net/2011June into your WEBSITE folder: J1ATH1.HTM J1ATHLETIC1.GIF J1BANNER.JPG J1BG1.JPG J1BG4.JPG J1IMG1.JPG J1IMG2.JPG J1IMG3.JPG J1IMG4.JPG J1IMG5.JPG J1IMG6.JPG J1IMG7.JPG J1IMG8.JPG J1IMG9.JPG J1IMG10.JPG J1SHOT.HTM J1SHOT.JPG J1STYLE1.CSS J1STYLE2.CSS J1STYLE3.CSS J1STYLE4.CSS J1STYLE5.CSS

30 Open the image J1BG1.JPG in a suitable application.

(You will manipulate this image to create the background image which will be used in a stylesheet.)

31 Resize the image so that it is 800 pixels wide and maintain its aspect ratio. Take a screenshot to show how you resized the image. Place this in the evidence document you created in step 1.

Save this image as J1BG2.JPG in your WEBSITE folder.


Save the image as J1BG3.JPG in your WEBSITE folder.

Show screenshot evidence of the file size of these images in your evidence document.

33 Open the image J1ATHLETIC1.GIF in a suitable application.

34 Flip the image so that the athlete faces the left side of the page. Save this image as J1ATHLETIC2.JPG in your WEBSITE folder.

35 Using a suitable software package, open the file J1SHOT.HTM

5


�

36 J1STYLE1.CSS has been attached to the webpage already, but may not be the most appropriate.

These stylesheets are available for you to use. They are:

J1STYLE1.CSS J1STYLE2.CSS J1STYLE3.CSS J1STYLE4.CSS

Select the most appropriate stylesheet and attach it to this webpage.

37 If necessary, resize your browser window so that the background image fits the window without tiling.


39 Change the html so that the image J1SHOT.JPG is 90 pixels wide and maintains its aspect ratio.

40 Set the cell padding in the middle table to 3 pixels.

41 Set the cell spacing in the middle table to 3 pixels.

42 Select from the WEBSITE folder, the most appropriate images to replace the words in the bottom table:

• Swimming

• Archery

• Boxing

• Basketball

43 Make sure that each image placed in step 42 is 50 pixels high and that it maintains its aspect ratio.

44 Create a hyperlink from the text Click Here to point to the website http://www.RockICT.net which should open in a new window called _webteam

45 Create a hyperlink from the image J1ATHLETIC2.JPG to point to the webpage named J1ATH1.HTM which should open in the current window.

46 Save the webpage as J1SHOT1.HTM




47 Save and print the document you called EVIDENCE in step 1.

6

© UCLES 2011 0417/31/M/J/11



• the external stylesheet is attached to the webpage

• the image J1SHOT.JPG has a width of 90 pixels and has its aspect ratio maintained

• the middle table has the cell padding set to 3 pixels

• the middle table has the cell spacing set to 3 pixels

• each of the images placed in the bottom table is 50 pixels high

• the hyperlink from the text ‘Click Here’ opens the RockICT website in a new window called _webteam

• the hyperlink from J1ATHLETIC2.JPG opens the webpage called J1ATH1.HTM in the current window




*4219601057*




2 hours 30 minutes










2

© UCLES 2011 0417/32/M/J/11

�

1 Create a word processed document. Save this with the filename EVIDENCE


You work for a company called RockICT. You are going to create a new webpage to show some Olympic records as part of a website. This webpage must open in any browser with any screen resolution.

3 Create a new folder called CIEWEB in your work area.

Download the following files from http://www.RockICT.net/2011JunWork to your CIEWEB folder: J1-2012.CSS J1-2012.PNG J1BANNER.JPG J1BG1.PNG J1FLAG.PNG J1GRA1.JPG J1GRA2.JPG J1GRA3.JPG J1GRA4.JPG J1GRA5.JPG J1JUMP.JPG J1LONDON.JPG J1TRACK.JPG

4 Open the stylesheet J1-2012.CSS in a suitable editor. Edit this file so that the background image is J1FLAG.PNG

Save this file as 2012.CSS in your CIEWEB folder.

5 Place a copy of this stylesheet into your EVIDENCE document.

3


�

6 Using a suitable software package, create a new webpage called J1RECORDS.HTM

Create a structure which will look like this, using a table:

A D

E F G H

J K L M

B

C

N

O

I

The letters shown in this diagram are to help you place objects in the correct table cells.

7 Attach the stylesheet 2012.CSS to this webpage.


9 Set the cell spacing for the table to 5 pixels.

10 Set the cell padding for the table to 3 pixels.

11 Set the horizontal and vertical alignment for cells A to H in the table to be centre aligned.

12 Create an anchor called TOP at the top of the page.

13 Place the image J1-2012.PNG in cell A.

14 Place the text Edited by and your name, Centre number and candidate number in cell B.

Set this text as style h3.

15 Using a suitable software package, open the image J1BANNER.JPG

Crop the bottom off this image to remove the sponsor’s name. Save the new image as J1BANNER1.JPG.

16 Place the image J1BANNER1.JPG in cell C. Set the width of this image to 360 pixels and maintain its aspect ratio.

17 Search the Internet to find an image of the Olympic rings. Place this image in cell D. Set the width of this image to 160 pixels and maintain its aspect ratio.

18 Place the image J1TRACK.JPG in cell E.

19 Place the image J1JUMP.JPG in cell F.

4

© UCLES 2011 0417/32/M/J/11

�

20 Select the most appropriate image from your CIEWEB folder to show a runner.

Edit this image, by removing the yellow colour, so that it becomes black and white.

Save this image using a filename of your choice.

Place this image in cell G.

21 Select the most appropriate image from your CIEWEB folder to show a javelin thrower.

Place this image in cell H.

22 Enter the text Men’s Olympic records in cell I.


23 Enter the text Record Holder in cell J.


24 Search the Internet to find the current Olympic record holder for the men’s long jump. Place his name in cell K.


25 Search the Internet to find the current Olympic record holder for the men’s 100 metres. Place his name in cell L.


26 Search the Internet to find the current Olympic record holder for the men’s javelin. Place his name in cell M.


27 Enter the text Contact us for great ticket deals. Watch the next generation of amazing athletes try to shatter these records! in cell N.


28 Enter the text Click Here to return to the top of the page. in cell O.


29 Make only the words Click Here a hyperlink to the anchor called TOP


Print the HTML source.

31 Open this page in your web browser. Print screenshot evidence of this page.


5


You are going to create a short presentation to be displayed as an on-screen carousel in London railway stations to advertise Olympic events.

�

32 Import into your presentation authoring software the file J1PRES.RTF


(This should provide four slides, each containing a title and some bullet points.)

33 Edit the master slide so it has:

• a plain white background

• the image J1LONDON.JPG resized so that it is only half the length and height of the original and placed in the very top left corner

• your Centre number, candidate number and name in a 12 point serif font, left aligned in the bottom left corner

• automatic slide numbers in the top right corner.

Apply this master slide to all slides.


35 Enter the text From train to track! as the title for the slide.

Enter the text London 2012 Olympics as a subtitle for the slide.

Move the title so that it is below the subtitle.

36 Split the last bullet point on slide 5 so that each country becomes a new bullet point. Remove any other text or punctuation from these 3 bullets. Format the bullets for each country in the same style as the last 3 bullets on slide 2.

37 Search the Internet to find an image of a map showing these three countries. If necessary, edit this image to remove other countries. Place this image on slide 5 on the right half of the slide. Make sure that the image fills more than ½ the height of the slide and maintains its aspect ratio.

38 Use the Internet to identify on the map which of the three countries is which. On slide 5, draw an arrow to point from the name of each country to the country on the map.


40 On all slides make sure that no objects overlap any of the other objects on the slide or any master slide items.

41 Save the presentation using a new filename. Print the slides with one slide on each page.

6

© UCLES 2011 0417/32/M/J/11

Your manager has asked you to manipulate some spreadsheets about train arrivals to stations in London recorded over a 10 minute period.

�

42 Using a suitable software package, load the file J1ARRIVE.CSV

43 Create a named range called ARR which contains only cells A2 to B25. Take a screenshot to show the range and its name. Add this to your EVIDENCE document.

44 Save and print your EVIDENCE document.

45 Using a suitable software package, load the file J1TRAIN.CSV


47 In cell A2, use a lookup function to show the name of the station at which the train arrives. Use the Code column for the lookup value and the named range ARR in file J1ARRIVE.CSV for the array.

Replicate this function into cells A3 to A8 so that the station name is shown for each of the codes.

48 In cell C2, use a function to count the number of trains arriving at this station where the value in the Arrival code column matches the contents of cell B2.

This function must include both absolute and relative referencing and must not use a named range. Do not count any entries in rows 1 to 10.

Replicate this function into cells C3 to C8 to calculate the number of trains arriving at each of the other stations.

49 In cell D11 use a formula to return N if the value in the Minutes late column is less than or equal to zero or to return Y if the value in the Minutes late column is greater than zero.

Replicate this function for all other trains.

50 Save the spreadsheet and print cells A1 to D25 only, showing the formulae used. Make sure that the contents of all cells in this range are fully visible and that the printout fits on a single page wide.

Make sure that your name, candidate number and Centre number are printed in the header of the page.

7

© UCLES 2011 0417/32/M/J/11


• your name, Centre number and candidate number are present


• the table has a width of 95%

• the cell spacing for the table is 5 pixels

• the cell padding for the table is 3 pixels

• the horizontal and vertical alignment for the top three rows of the table are centre aligned

• the anchor ‘Top’ has been placed

• the image J1BANNER.JPG has the width set to 360 pixels

• the image of the Olympic rings has the width set to 160 pixels

• the hyperlink from the text ‘Click here’ links to the anchor ‘Top’




*4425774919*




2 hours 30 minutes










2

© UCLES 2011 0417/03/O/N/11

�

1 Create a new word processed document. Save this with the filename EVIDENCE


You work for a company called Hothouse Design. You are going to manipulate a spreadsheet about the performance of athletes in the javelin as they prepare for the 2012 Olympic games.

3 Using a suitable software package, load the file N1JAVELIN.CSV


Place the automated file name and file path in the footer.

5 Search the internet to find the current Olympic record holders for the men’s and women’s javelin. These records will be those set after April 1, 1986 when the type of javelin changed.

For each of these records, find the:

• athlete’s name

• country that they represented

• distance thrown in metres to 2 decimal places

• year the record was set

• name of the city hosting the Olympic games in that year.

Place this information in cells B3 to F4 of the spreadsheet.

6 Print only cells A1 to F4. Make sure that your name, Centre number and candidate number are printed in the header of the page.

7 In cell A8 use a lookup function to show the country name in full. Use the Code column for the lookup value and the file N1COUNTRY2.CSV for the array. This function must include both absolute and relative referencing and must not use a named range.

Replicate this function so that the country name is shown in full for each athlete.

8 In cell K8 use a function to select and display the longest of the 6 throws made by the athlete.

Replicate this function so that the best throw is shown for each athlete.

Because athletes sometimes miss a throw or throw outside the area, this is recorded in the spreadsheet as a no throw using the letters NT.

9 In cell L8 use a function to add the distances of all the throws for this athlete. Ensure that the function does not include the distance if it is recorded as NT (a no throw).

Replicate this function so that the total distance thrown is shown for each athlete.

10 In cell M8 use a function to count the number of throws that were NOT recorded as NT.

Replicate this function so that the number of throws that were NOT recorded as NT is shown for each athlete.

3


�

11 In cell N8 calculate the average throw length for only the throws where a distance was recorded. Use the contents of cells L8 and M8 to help you.

Round this value to 1 decimal place.

Replicate this function so that the average throw length is shown for each athlete.

12 In cell O8 use a formula to display the word Yes if the athlete’s longest throw breaks the Olympic record or display the word No if it does not. (Remember that there are two records, one for men and one for women.)

Replicate this formula so that this is automatically displayed for each athlete.

13 Right align all cells in columns D to O inclusive.


15 Save the data model with the filename ATHLETES

16 Hide columns B to J

17 Print the spreadsheet showing the formulae used. Make sure that the contents of all these cells are visible and that the printout fits on two pages wide. Make sure that the row and column headings are visible when printed.


18 Make all data in columns A to O fully visible.

19 Select only the athletes where the Country is Great Britain.

Use the athletes’ names and the average distance that each of these athletes throws the javelin to create a vertical bar chart.

20 Label this chart with the title British javelin throwers

21 Make sure that category axis labels show the names of the athletes and these are fully visible.

22 Print this chart. Save this using the filename CHART


23 Open the spreadsheet saved in step 15.

24 Hide columns L and M

25 Format only the cells in rows 6 and 7 so that they are bold, italic and centre aligned.

26 Interrogate the data to find all the athletes who have broken the current Olympic record.

27 Sort this data into descending order of Gender, then into descending order on the Best throw column, showing the values and labels in full (except columns L and M).

28 Print this data showing the values.


4

© UCLES 2011 0417/03/O/N/11


�

29 Create a new folder called WEB11N in your work area.

Download the following files from http://www.hothouse-design.co.uk/201111 into your WEB11N folder: N1SWIM1.HTM N1SWIM.GIF N1BANNER2.JPG N1BG5.JPG N1BG8.JPG N1IMG11.JPG N1IMG12.JPG N1IMG13.JPG N1IMG14.JPG N1IMG15.JPG N1IMG16.JPG N1IMG17.JPG N1IMG18.JPG N1IMG19.JPG N1IMG20.JPG N1JAVELIN.HTM N1JAVELIN.JPG N1STYLE6.CSS N1STYLE7.CSS N1STYLE8.CSS N1STYLE9.CSS N1STYLEX.CSS

30 Open the image N1BG5.JPG in a suitable application.

(You will manipulate this image to create the background image which will be used in a stylesheet.)


Save this image as N1BG6.JPG in your WEB11N folder.


Save the image as N1BG7.JPG in your WEB11N folder.

Show screenshot evidence of the file size of these images in your evidence document.

33 Open the image N1SWIM.GIF in a suitable application.

34 Flip the image so that the swimmer faces the right side of the page. Save this image as N1SWIM2.JPG in your WEB11N folder.

35 Using a suitable software package, open the file N1JAVELIN.HTM

5


�

36 N1STYLE6.CSS has been attached to the webpage already, but may not be the most appropriate.

These stylesheets are available for you to use. They are:

N1STYLE6.CSS N1STYLE7.CSS N1STYLE8.CSS N1STYLE9.CSS

Select the most appropriate stylesheet and attach it to this webpage.



39 Change the html so that the image N1JAVELIN.JPG is 80 pixels wide and maintains its aspect ratio.

40 Set the cell padding in the middle table to 4 pixels.

41 Set the cell spacing in the middle table to 4 pixels.

42 Select from the WEB11N folder, the most appropriate images to replace the words in the bottom table:

• Archery

• Athletics

• Cycling

• Fencing

43 Make sure that each image placed in step 42 is 50 pixels high and that it maintains its aspect ratio.

44 Create a hyperlink from the text Click Here to point to the website http://www.hothouse-design.co.uk which should open in a new window called _hothouseweb

45 Create a hyperlink from the image N1SWIM2.JPG to point to the webpage named N1SWIM1.HTM which should open in the current window.

46 Save the webpage as N1JAVELIN1.HTM




47 Save and print the document you called EVIDENCE in step 1.

6

© UCLES 2011 0417/03/O/N/11




• the image N1JAVELIN.JPG has a width of 80 pixels and has its aspect ratio maintained

• the middle table has the cell padding set to 4 pixels

• the middle table has the cell spacing set to 4 pixels

• each of the images placed in the bottom table is 50 pixels high

• the hyperlink from the text ‘Click Here’ opens the Hothouse website in a new window called _hothouseweb

• the hyperlink from N1SWIM2.JPG opens the webpage called N1SWIM1.HTM in the current window




*2361514415*




2 hours 30 minutes










2

© UCLES 2012 0417/21/M/J/12

You work for Tawara Star Approved Sales and are going to perform some administrative tasks for this company.

�

1 Create a document called Evidence

You will place evidence in this document during the examination.

Make sure your name, Centre number and candidate number appear on every page of this document when printed.

2

Add to your address book the following details for Mr Lucknow, the owner of the company.

Job title Company Principal email address [email protected]

Show evidence that you have created this contact (showing name, job title and email address) by taking a screenshot and placing it in your evidence document.

You will need to use this email address later.

3 Open the webpage http://www.RockICT.net/tawara2112

Download and save the files in your work area.

The files you need to download are:

JXIITEXT.RTF

JXIICARS.CSV

JXIIMICROS.CSV

JXIIPRES.RTF

JXIIIMG_3.JPG

JXIIMICROSALES.CSV

Show in your evidence document that you have saved the files in your work area. (This may be achieved by taking screenshots.)

3


You are now going to edit a document about the sale of cars.

�

4 Using a suitable software package, load the file JXIITEXT.RTF




8

Place in the header:


• your candidate number and your Centre number right aligned.


• today’s date centre aligned

• an automated page number right aligned.



9 Insert this heading at the start of the document Tawara Star Approved Sales

10 Make the heading right aligned.



13 Add the text

Interview with Mr Lucknow by:

and add your name.

Make this a subheading, and place it below the heading.

14 Set both the heading and subheading to the same serif font.


16 Make the subheading italic but not underlined.


18 Format the text after the subheading to

• three equally spaced columns

• have a 1 centimetre gap between the columns

• a 12 point sans serif font

• 1.5 line spacing

• be fully justified.

4

© UCLES 2012 0417/21/M/J/12

�

19 Open the file JXIIMICROS.CSV and insert the contents as a table after the last paragraph.

20 Format the text in the table to

• match the font style and size of the body text

• make only the text in the top two rows bold and underlined

• make only the text in the top two rows centre aligned.

21 Format the table to

• merge only the cells in the top row

• apply a light (20 – 40%) grey shade to only the top two rows

• display all gridlines when printed

• fit within the column width

• align the text to the top of the cells.

22 Replace the text (Insert picture here) with the image JXIIIMG_3.JPG

23 Align the image with the left margin of the column.

Re-size the image to fill the column and maintain the aspect ratio.


24 Spell-check the document.

25 Proof-read your document to make sure that:

• it has consistent line spacing

• it has consistent paragraph spacing


• there are no widows or orphans


• it is complete.


27 Print the document.

5


You are going to prepare some reports for the company. Make sure all currency values are in Euros to two decimal places. The Date_sold field must be in the format DD/MM/YYYY.

�

28 Using a suitable database package, import the file JXIICARS.CSV


VIN Text Model Text Power Text Engine_size Text Price Numeric / Currency Colour Text Discount_applied Numeric / 2 decimal places Location Text Date_sold Date Sales_person Text Sold Boolean / Logical

Make sure that you use these field names. The VIN is the Vehicle Identification Number, and each car will have a different VIN.

29 Save a screen shot showing the field names and data types used. Place a copy of this screen shot in your evidence file.


VIN Model Power Engine_size Price Colour Location Sold

377C15423018 MicroZed D 1200 11000 Red Madrid No

377C15423019 MicroZed D 1200 11000 Green Paris No

377C15423020 MicroZed D 1200 11000 Gold Hamburg No


32 Save the data.


• shows only the records where the Model is MicroZed and the car has not been sold

• shows only the fields VIN, Model, Power, Engine_size, Price, Colour, Location and Sold with their labels in full




• calculates the total number of MicroZed cars for sale

• has the label Number of cars for sale for the total

• includes the heading List of MicroZed cars for sale at the top of the page



6

© UCLES 2012 0417/21/M/J/12

�


• contains a new field called Discount which is calculated at run-time. This will be Price multiplied by Discount_applied

• contains a new field called Sale_price which is calculated at run-time. This will be Price minus the Discount

• has the Discount and Sale_price fields set as Currency with 2 decimal places


• shows only the records where Sold is Yes, sales were made in 2012 and the Sales_person is Geldorf

• shows only the fields Sales_person, Model, Price, Discount, Date_sold, Sale_price and Sold

• is sorted into ascending order of Model

• calculates the total value of these sales and places this value below the Sale_price column

• has the total value formatted as currency with 2 decimal places

• includes a label to the left of the total value Total value of sales

• includes the report title Sales record for Geldorf

• has your name, Centre number and candidate number on the left at the bottom of the report.


7


You are now going to prepare a presentation for the company.

�

37 Create a master slide with the following styles:

• titles should be in a 36 point serif font and centred

• subtitles should be in an 18 point serif font and left aligned

• bullets should be left aligned and consistent

38 Place the following items on the master slide:

• Draw two thick (about 3 point) vertical lines down the slide on the left side

• Draw a thick (about 3 point) horizontal line across the width of the slide about 3 cm from the top of the slide

• Find a picture of a star from clipart and place this between the vertical lines above the horizontal line

• Enter your name, Centre number and candidate number in a 12 point serif font at the bottom left of the master slide but not overlapping the lines

• Slide numbers should appear at the bottom right of each slide

Your master slide may look like this:

39 Make sure all master slide items appear on all slides and that no master slide or slide contents overlap each other.

40 Import the file JXIIPRES.RTF and place the text as slides in a new presentation in your presentation software.

(The text within the file should appear on 4 new slides as headings and bulleted lists.

NB if your presentation software cannot import the .rtf file, then open the file and copy and paste the text into four new slides in your presentation software.)

41 Apply the layout title and subtitle to the first slide.

42 Create a pie chart using the data in the file JXIIMICROSALES.CSV

43 Place this chart on slide 4.

44 Add presenter notes to this slide:

We are pleased to report good sales of the MicroEco model.

45 Apply transitions between slides.

Take a screenshot to show that transitions have been set and place this in your evidence document.

8



© UCLES 2012 0417/21/M/J/12

�

46 Set bullet point animation so that they appear one by one.

Take a screenshot of this and place it in your evidence document.

47 Save the presentation and print the slides as handouts with two slides per page.

48 Print slide 4 on its own showing the presenter notes.



• with a blind carbon copy to the Company Principal (from the contacts list) saved at step 2

• with the subject line Interview article


• your name



• the text: Please approve this first draft of my interview with Mr Lucknow.

50 Attach only the word-processed document you have been working on to your email.

51 Take a copy of this email, showing clearly that the attachment is present and place it in your evidence document.

52 Send the email.

53 Save your evidence document.

54 Print your evidence document. Make sure that your name, Centre number and candidate number appear on each page of this document when printed.




*8366735912*




2 hours 30 minutes










2

© UCLES 2012 0417/22/M/J/12

You work for Star of Tawara Approved Sales and are going to perform some tasks for this company.

�

1 Create an evidence document called June2012

You will use this to store evidence during the examination.


2 Open the webpage http://Hothouse-design.co.uk/2212tawara


The files you need to download are:

J12REPORT.RTF

J12MOTORS.CSV

J12MODELS.CSV

J12SALES.RTF

J12MICROSALES.CSV

J12IMG_3.JPG


You are going to prepare a presentation for the company.

3 Create a master slide with the following styles:

• titles should be in a 30 point serif font and left aligned

• subtitles should be in a 20 point serif font and left aligned

• bullets should be left aligned and consistent.

3


�

4 Place the following items on the master slide:

• Draw two thick (about 3 point) vertical lines down the slide on the right side

• Draw a thick (about 3 point) horizontal line across the width of the slide about 3 cm from the bottom of the slide

• Find a picture of a car from clipart and place this between the vertical lines below the horizontal line

• Enter your name, Centre number and candidate number in a 12 point serif font at the top right of the master slide but not overlapping the lines

• Slide numbers should appear at the top left of each slide.

5 Make sure all master slide items appear on all slides and that no master slide or slide contents overlap each other.

6 Import the file J12SALES.RTF and place the text as slides in a new presentation in your presentation software.

(The text within the file should appear on 4 new slides as headings and bulleted lists.

NB if your presentation software cannot import the .rtf file, then open the file and copy and paste the text into four new slides in your presentation software.)

7 Apply the layout title and subtitle to the first slide.

8 Move slide 4 to become slide 2.

9 Create a vertical bar chart using the data in the file J12MICROSALES.CSV

This chart should compare sales in 2010 with sales in 2011 for each model.

10 Place this chart on slide 2.

11 Apply transitions between slides.

Take a screenshot to show that transitions have been set and place this in your evidence document.

12 Set bullet point animation so that they are timed to appear one by one automatically.

Take a screenshot of the animation settings and place it in your evidence document.

13 Print the slides as handouts with two to a page.

14 Save the presentation with the filename UPDATE

4

© UCLES 2012 0417/22/M/J/12


�

15 Using a suitable software package, load the file J12REPORT.RTF




19


• your name and your candidate number left aligned




• an automated page number centre aligned.

Make sure that all the alignments match the margins.


20 Insert this heading at the start of the document Star of Tawara Approved Sales



23 Make the heading italic.

24 Add the text

Interview conducted by:

and add your name.

Make this a subheading, and place it below the heading.

25 Set both the heading and subheading to the same sans-serif font.


27 Make the subheading underlined.


29 Format the text after the subheading to

• two equally spaced columns


• a 14 point serif font

• single line spacing


5


�

30 Open the file J12MODELS.CSV and insert the contents as a table after the last paragraph.

31 Format the text in the table to

• match the font style and size of the body text

• make only the text in the top row underlined

• make only the text in the second row italic

• make only the text in the top two rows centre aligned.

32 Format the table to

• merge only the cells in the top row

• display all gridlines when printed

• fit within the column width

• align the text to the top of the cells.

33 Replace the text (Insert picture here) with the image J12IMG_3.JPG

Align the image with the left margin of the column. Re-size the image to fill the column and maintain the aspect ratio.

34 Make sure the text wraps above and below the image.




• it has consistent line spacing

• it has consistent paragraph spacing




• it is complete.



6

© UCLES 2012 0417/22/M/J/12

You are going to prepare some reports for the company. Make sure all currency values are in Euros to two decimal places. The DateSold field must be in the format DD/MM/YYYY.

�

39 Using a suitable database package, import the file J12MOTORS.CSV


VIN Text Model Text Power Text EngineSize Text Price Numeric / Currency Colour Text DiscountApplied Numeric / Integer Location Text DateSold Date SalesPerson Text Sold Boolean / Logical




VIN Model Power EngineSize Price Colour Location Sold

377C15423018 MicroEco E N/A 13000 Red Rotterdam No

377C15423019 MicroEco E N/A 13000 Green Rotterdam No

377C15423020 MicroEco E N/A 13000 Gold Rotterdam No


43 Save the data.


• shows only the records where the Model is MicroEco and the car has not been sold

• shows only the fields VIN, Model, Power, EngineSize, Price, Colour, Location and Sold with their labels in full



• sorts the data into ascending order of Location and then ascending order of VIN

• calculates the total number of MicroEco cars for sale

• has the label Number of cars for sale for the total

• includes the heading List of MicroEco cars for sale at the top of the page



7


�


• contains a new field called Discount which is calculated at run-time. This will be Price multiplied by DiscountApplied divided by 100

• contains a new field called SalePrice which is calculated at run-time. This will be Price minus the Discount

• has the Discount and SalePrice fields set as Currency with 2 decimal places

• shows only the records where Sold is Yes, sales were made in 2012 and the SalesPerson is Villalobos

• shows only the fields SalesPerson, Model, Price, Discount, DateSold, SalePrice and Sold

• is sorted into ascending order of Model


• calculates the total value of these sales and places this value below the SalePrice column

• has the total value formatted as currency with 2 decimal places

• includes a label to the left of the calculated value Total value of sales

• includes the report title 2012 Sales record for Villalobos

• has your name, Centre number and candidate number on the right at the top of the report.


48 Add the following details for Ms Kaif Asif, the chief executive officer of the company, to your address book.

Job title CEO email address [email protected]


49

Prepare an email message:


• copied to the CEO (from the contacts list)

• with the subject line Sales Presentation


• your name



• the text: Attached is the presentation for your approval.

50 Attach only the presentation you saved at step 14 to your email.

51 Take screenshot evidence of this email, showing clearly that the attachment is present and place it in your evidence document.

8



© UCLES 2012 0417/22/M/J/12

�

52 Send the email.


54 Print your evidence document. Make sure that your name, Centre number and candidate number appear on each page of this document when printed.




*1541009364*




2 hours 30 minutes










2

© UCLES 2012 0417/02/O/N/12

You work for a company called Tawara Star Family Cars. You are going to perform some clerical tasks for this company.

�

1 Create a document called Evidence

You will place evidence in this document during the examination.


2

Add the following contact for Sebastian Felin who is the sales director of the company to your address book.

Sales Director [email protected]


You will need to use this email address later.

3 Open the webpage http://hothouse-design.co.uk/novtawara2


The files you need are:

N122IMG_4.JPG

N122TEXT2.RTF

N122SALES.CSV

N122CARS.CSV

N122NEWMODS.RTF


3



�

4 Using a suitable software package, load the file N122TEXT2.RTF




8



• your candidate number centre aligned




• an automated page number centre aligned.



9 Insert this title at the start of the document Tawara Star Family Cars

10 Make the title centre aligned.


12 Add the text

Latest Company News by:

and add your name.

Make this a subtitle and place it below the title.

13 Set both the title and subtitle to the same sans-serif font.


15 Make the subtitle italic and underlined.

16 Make the subtitle right aligned.

17 Format the text after the subtitle (the body text) to:

• two equally spaced columns


• a 14 point serif font



18 Make sure that there is one blank line space after each paragraph and that this spacing is consistent.

4

© UCLES 2012 0417/02/O/N/12

�

19 Identify the subheadings and make them centre aligned and italic.

20 Insert the text file N122NEWMODS.RTF before the subheading Sales Report.

21 Format the text to match the style of the main document.

22 Open the file N122SALES.CSV and use the sales figures for each of the models to create a pie chart.

23 Format the chart to display:

• segment labels with the model names in full

• the title Number of cars sold

Pull out or highlight the segment which shows the best selling model.

Do not display a legend.

24 Insert the chart after the subheading Sales Report.

25 Resize the chart to fit within the margins of the column.

26 Replace the text (Insert picture of new showroom) with the image N122IMG_4.JPG

Align the image with the right margin of the column and the top of the second paragraph. Re-size the image so its width fills half the column and maintain the aspect ratio.

27 Make sure the text wraps round the image.



29 Save the document with a new name.

5


You are going to prepare some reports for the company. Make sure all currency values are in Euros to two decimal places. The Date_sold field must be in the format DD/MM/YYYY.

�

30 Using a suitable database package, import the file N122CARS.CSV


VIN Text Model Text Power Text Engine_size Text

Price Numeric / Currency Colour Text Discount_applied Numeric / Integer Location Text Date_sold Date Sales_person Text Sold Boolean / Logical



32 Find the following three records for cars in Paris which have now been sold.

Update the records for these cars by entering the following data into the Discount_applied, Date_sold, Sales_person and Sold fields.

VIN Model Price Colour Discount_applied Date_sold Sales_person Sold

377C15423003 MicroZed 11000 Blue 10 06/05/2012 Algier Yes

377C15423010 Micro 8500 Red 10 08/05/2012 Algier Yes

377C15423012 MicroSE 12000 Blue 10 09/05/2012 Algier Yes


34 Save the data.

6

© UCLES 2012 0417/02/O/N/12

�


• shows only the records where the Model is MicroSE and the car has not been sold

• shows only the fields VIN, Model, Power, Engine_size, Price, Colour, Location and Sold with their labels in full



• sorts the data into ascending order of Location

• calculates the total number of MicroSE cars for sale

• has the label Hybrid power cars for the total

• includes the heading List of MicroSE cars in stock at the top of the report

• has your name, Centre number and candidate number at the top of each page.



• contains a new field called Discount_value which is calculated at run-time. In this field you will multiply the Price by the Discount_applied divided by 100.

• has the Discount_value field formatted as Currency


• shows only the records that where Sold is Yes, sales were made after the end of the year 2011 and the Sales_person is Algier

• shows only the fields Sales_person, Model, Price, Discount_applied, Date_sold, Discount_value and Sold

• is sorted into ascending order of Date_sold

• calculates the total value of discounts given by Algier and places this value below the Discount_value column

• has this total value formatted as currency

• includes a label to the left of the calculated value Discounts given

• includes the report title Sales discounts for Algier

• has your name, Centre number and candidate number on the left at the bottom of the report.


39 Find only the MicroEco cars that have been sold in Madrid

Using this selection produce a new report which:

• shows only the Sales_person, Model and Price

• calculates the total value of these sales for each Sales_person

• counts the number of these cars sold by each Sales_person

40 Save this report in a form which can be imported into another document.

7


�

41 Add the text

Sales of the MicroEco by our sales team in Spain are really taking off.

as a new paragraph at the end of the document you saved at step 29.

Place the report you saved at step 40 after this paragraph. Make sure the report fits within the column.


• text styles are applied consistently

• it has consistent line and paragraph spacing

• charts and tables are not split and fit within the column



• it is complete.





• and to the Sales Director (from the contacts list)

• with the subject line New showroom


• your name



• the text: Please approve this first draft of the new sales report.

46 Attach only the document saved at step 43 to your email.

47 Take a copy of this email, showing clearly that the attachment is present and place it in your evidence document.

48 Send the email.


50 Print one copy of your evidence document. Make sure that your name, Centre number and candidate number appear on each page of this document when printed.



*5038468512*




2 hours 30 minutes










2

© UCLES 2012 0417/31/M/J/12

�

1 Create a new word processed document. Save this with the filename EVIDENCE You will use this to store evidence during the examination.

Place your name, Centre number and candidate number in the header of this document.

2 Create new folders called WEB31 and SS31 in your work area.

3 Open the webpage http://www.hothouse-design.co.uk/download31J2012

Follow the instructions to log in.

4 Download and save the following files into your WEB31 folder:

J12BACKGD1.JPG

J12BANNER1.JPG

J12BANNER2.JPG

J12DIVE.HTM

J12IMG1.JPG

J12IMG2.JPG

J12IMG3.JPG

J12IMG4.JPG

J12IMG5.JPG

J12IMG6.JPG

J12IMG7.JPG

J12IMG8.JPG

J12LIST.TXT

J12STYLE1.CSS

J12TABLE1.HTM

J12TABLE3.HTM

J12TEXT.TXT

J12TREE.JPG

Download and save the file J12EMPLOYEES.CSV in your SS31 folder.

3


You work for a company called Hothouse Design. You are going to create new web pages for a client called The Xtreme Adventure Holiday Company.

�

5 Open the image J12BACKGD1.JPG in a suitable application.

(You will manipulate this to create the background image which will be used in the stylesheet.)


7 Save this image as J12BACKGD2.JPG in your WEB31 folder.


Save the image as J12BACKGD3.JPG in your WEB31 folder.

Place screenshot evidence of the file size of this image in your evidence document.

9 Using a suitable software package, create a new webpage called XAHC.HTM

Attach the stylesheet J12STYLE1.CSS to this webpage. As you create the webpage make sure that the styles within the stylesheet are not changed.


11 This webpage must open in any browser and will have three separate tables placed like this:

TABLE 1

TABLE 2

TABLE 3

12 Create Table 1 using the contents of J12TABLE1.HTM

13 Set the width of this table to 100% of the width of the window.

4

© UCLES 2012 0417/31/M/J/12

�

14 Replace the text Place Table 1 anchor here with an anchor called top

Make sure that this anchor is not visible in the browser.

15 Replace the text Candidate details with your name, Centre number and candidate number.

16 Create Table 2 with 4 rows and 2 columns as shown.


18 Align this table with the centre of the window.

19 Place the image J12TREE.JPG in the right cell of this table.

20 Using the contents of the file J12TEXT.TXT

• place the text We offer holidays to suit your every need; we can often make dreams come true... into the top left cell of this table.

• place the text Try zip wires in Mexico, cross-country skiing in Finland or alpine skiing in Switzerland. into the second row on the left side of this table.

• place the text Ever driven off-road on ATVs or in amphibious vehicles? Try the jungle, mountain passes or frozen wastes to enhance the experience. into the third row on the left side of this table.

• place the text Combine this with superb value for money. Contact us with your requirements and we are sure that we will not disappoint you. into the bottom left cell of this table.

21 Apply style h3 to all the text added in step 20.

22 Create Table 3 using the contents of J12TABLE3.HTM

23 Set the table width of this table to 100% of the width of the window.

24 Replace the text Place Table 3 anchor here with an anchor called combi


25 Create a hyperlink from the text Combination Holidays in Table 1 to the anchor called combi.

26 In the text Return to the top of the page by clicking on this link. make only the words clicking on this link a hyperlink to the anchor called top.

27 Replace the text Date & Time here with the date and time.

28 Replace the words Zip wire in Table 3 with the most appropriate image from those obtained in step 4.

29 Replace the words Scuba diving in Table 3 with the most appropriate image from those obtained in step 4.

Create a hyperlink from this image to point to the file J12DIVE.HTM which should open in a new window called _undersea

30 Replace the word Skiing in Table 3 with the most appropriate image from those obtained in step 4.

5


�

31 Replace the words Off-road driving in Table 3 with the most appropriate image from those obtained in step 4.

32 Replace the words Contact us in Table 3 with the most appropriate image from those obtained in step 4.

Create a hyperlink from this image to send an email message to [email protected] with a subject line Xtreme Adventure

33 Make sure that all of the images placed in steps 28 to 32 are 120 pixels wide. Maintain the aspect ratio of each image.

34 Save the page as XAHC.HTM in your WEB31 folder.

Open this page in a web browser.

Print this page from your browser.



Attach the stylesheet J12STYLE1.CSS to this webpage. As you create the webpage make sure that the styles within the stylesheet are not changed.


37 Replace the text Heading here with the text Scuba diving with:

Apply style h2 to this text.

38 Using the contents of the file J12LIST.TXT replace the text List here with the text Novice divers… also catered for.

Apply the following styles:

Novice divers can: as style p

try out in the pool as style li

learn our safety tips as style li

learn confined water skills as style li

try out in the sea as style li

dive with an instructor as style li

qualify as an Open Water diver. as style li

You can: as style p

have fun as style li

discover a whole new world as style li

experience amazing fish. as style li

Experienced divers also catered for. as style p

39 Format the first list as an ordered list.

40 Format the second list as an unordered list.

41 Replace the text Image here with the image for scuba diving downloaded in step 4. Do not resize this image.

6

© UCLES 2012 0417/31/M/J/12

�

42 Save the page as J12DIVE.HTM in your WEB31 folder.




The Xtreme Adventure Holiday Company has an office in Switzerland. This office has 37 employees and they use a spreadsheet to record the hours worked each week and calculate their pay. All currency values are recorded in Euros with 2 decimal places.

43 Using a suitable software package, load the file J12EMPLOYEES.CSV

44 Place your Centre number, candidate number and name, centre aligned in the header of this file.

45 On the left in the footer add the text Week 27

On the right in the footer add the text Last edited on followed by today’s date and time.

46 Merge cells A1 to G1 so they become a single cell.

Format the text in this cell so it is a white 24 point serif font. Format this cell so that it has a black background colour. Centre align the contents of this cell.

47 Format cells B5 to B8 as currency.

48 Save the data model and print a copy of cells A3 to B20 only, showing the values. Make sure that the contents of all cells in this range are fully visible and that the printout fits on a single portrait page.

49 Use the cells A12 to B20 to create a named range called JC

Show evidence of the creation of this named range in your evidence document.

50 In cell D24 use a lookup function to show the Job Description. Use the Code column for the lookup value and the range JC for the array.

Replicate this function so that the job description is shown for each of the other employees.

51 In cell F61 use a function to calculate the total number of hours worked by all employees.

52 In cell G24 use a formula to calculate the pay for this employee. This will look up the rate of pay from the Pay rates table and multiply it by the number of hours worked. This formula must include an absolute range, two relative references and must not include a named range. Choose an appropriate format for this cell.

Replicate this formula so that the amount of pay is shown for each of the other employees.

53 In cell G61 use a function to calculate the total weekly wage bill. Choose an appropriate format for this cell.

54 Save the spreadsheet and print the formulae and functions used in landscape orientation. Make sure that the contents of all cells are fully visible and that the printout is only one page wide.

55 Hide rows 3 to 21.

7


�

56 Print the spreadsheet showing the values. Make sure that the contents of all the required cells are fully visible and that the printout fits on a single page wide.

57 Hide row 61. Leave rows 3 to 21 hidden.

58 Extract only the employees with the word Snowboard in their job description who worked for 25 or more hours.

59 Print the extract showing the values. Make sure that the contents of all the required cells are fully visible and that the printout fits on a single page wide.

60 Save the spreadsheet.

61 Save and print your evidence document.

8



© UCLES 2012 0417/31/M/J/12



• the external stylesheet is attached to both webpages

• the table widths of all three tables in XAHC.HTM have been set

• the anchors top and combi have been placed

• Combination Holidays is set as a hyperlink to the anchor combi

• the hyperlink from the scuba diving image opens J12DIVE.HTM in a new window called _undersea

• the hyperlink from the contact us image sends an email message to [email protected] with a subject line Xtreme Adventure

• the hyperlink from the text ‘clicking on this link’ goes to the anchor top

• in the file J12Dive.htm you have set an ordered list

• in the file J12Dive.htm you have set an unordered list Write today’s date in the box below. Date



*5745321465*




2 hours 30 minutes










2

© UCLES 2012 0417/32/M/J/12

�

1 Create a new word processed document. Save this with the file name MAY2012



2 Create new folders called WEB32 and SS32 in your work area.

3 Open the webpage http://www.xahc.co.uk/download32J2012

Follow the instructions to log in.

4 Download and save the file J12STAFF.CSV into your SS32 folder.

5 Download and save the following files into your WEB32 folder:

J1232.CSS

J12BACKGD4.JPG

J12BANNER11.JPG

J12BANNER12.JPG

J12DIVE.HTM

J12FISH.TXT

J12IMG11.JPG

J12IMG12.JPG

J12IMG13.JPG

J12IMG14.JPG

J12IMG15.JPG

J12IMG16.JPG

J12IMG17.JPG

J12IMG18.JPG

J12TABLE4.HTM

J12TABLE6.HTM

J12TXT32.TXT

J12TREE.JPG

You work for a company called The Xtreme Adventure Holiday Company which has an office in Switzerland. This office has 37 employees and a spreadsheet is used to record the hours worked each week and to calculate their pay. All currency values are recorded in Euros with 2 decimal places.

6 Using a suitable software package, load the file J12STAFF.CSV

7 Add the text Week 29 left aligned in the header.

Place your Centre number, candidate number and name, right aligned in the header.

3


�

8 In the centre of the footer add the text Last edited on followed by today’s date and time.

9 Merge cells A1 to G1 so they become a single cell.

Format the text in this cell so it is a black 24 point serif font. Format this cell so that it has a grey striped background that will allow the text to be read.

10 Format cells B4 to B7 as currency.

11 Save the data model and print a copy of cells A3 to B18 only, showing the values. Make sure that the contents of all cells in this range are fully visible and that the printout fits on a single portrait page.

12 In cell D22 use a lookup function to show the Job Description. Use the Code column for the lookup value and the Job codes table for the array. This function must include both absolute and relative referencing and must not use a named range.

Replicate this function so that the job description is shown for each of the other employees.

13 In cell F59 use a function to calculate the average number of hours worked by all employees.

14 Use the cells A4 to B7 to create a named range called RATE

Show how you created this named range in your evidence document.

15 In cell G22 use a formula to calculate the pay for this employee. This will look up the rate of pay from the named range RATE and multiply it by the number of hours worked. Choose an appropriate format for this cell. This function must not include absolute cell referencing.

Replicate this formula so that the amount of pay is shown for each of the other employees.

16 In cell G60, use a function to calculate the total weekly wage bill. Choose an appropriate format for this cell.

17 Save the spreadsheet. Print the formulae and functions used in landscape orientation. Make sure that the contents of all cells are fully visible and that the printout fits on a single page wide.

18 Hide rows 3 to 18.

19 Print the spreadsheet showing the values. Make sure that the contents of all the required cells are fully visible and that the printout fits on a single page wide.

20 Hide rows 59 and 60. Leave rows 3 to 18 hidden.

21 Extract only the employees with the word Ski in their job description who worked for 25 or more hours.

22 Print the extract showing the values. Make sure that the contents of all the required cells are fully visible and that the printout fits on a single page.

4

© UCLES 2012 0417/32/M/J/12

You are going to create new web pages for the company.

�

23 Open the image J12BACKGD4.JPG from your WEB32 folder in a suitable application.


25 Save this image as J12BACKGD5.JPG in your WEB32 folder.

(This file will be used as the background image in a stylesheet.)


Save the image as J12BACKGD6.JPG in your WEB32 folder.

Place screenshot evidence of the file size of this image in your evidence document.


28 Using a suitable software package, create a new webpage called XA.HTM

Attach the stylesheet J1232.CSS to this webpage. As you create the webpage make sure that the styles within the stylesheet are not changed.

29 This webpage must open in any browser and will have three separate tables placed like this:

TABLE A

TABLE B

TABLE C

30 Create Table A using the contents of J12TABLE4.HTM


32 Replace the text Place anchor A here with an anchor called start


5


�

33 Replace the text Candidate details with your name, Centre number and candidate number.

34 Create Table B with 4 rows and 2 columns as shown.


36 Align Table B with the centre of the window.

37 Place the image J12TREE.JPG in the left cell of Table B.

38 Using the contents of the file J12TXT32.TXT

• place the text Make your dreams come true... Our holidays will accommodate your every need. into the top right cell of Table B.

• place the text Swim in the cenotes in Mexico, cross-country skiing in Norway or alpine skiing in France. into the second row on the right side of Table B.

• place the text For motor sports enthusiasts, try a skidoo through the snowy wastes or ride ATVs through a steamy jungle. into the third row on the right side of Table B.

• place the text We offer superb value for money. Contact us for further details. into the bottom right cell of Table B.

39 Format all the text added in step 38 as style h3.

40 Create Table C using the contents of J12TABLE6.HTM

41 Set the table width of the bottom table to 100% of the width of the window.

42 Replace the text Place anchor C here with an anchor called combine


43 Create a hyperlink from the text Combination Holidays in Table A to the anchor that you created in step 42.

44 In the text Return to the top of the page by clicking on this link. make only the words clicking on this link a hyperlink to the anchor called start

45 Replace the text Date & Time here with the date and time.

46 Select the most appropriate image from your WEB32 folder and use this to replace the words Cave swim in Table C.

47 Select the most appropriate image from your WEB32 folder and use this to replace the words Scuba diving in Table C.

Create a hyperlink from this image to point to the file J12DIVE.HTM which should open in a new window called _ocean

48 Select the most appropriate image from your WEB32 folder and use this to replace the word Skiing in the Table C.

49 Select the most appropriate image from your WEB32 folder and use this to replace the text ATV in Table C.

6

© UCLES 2012 0417/32/M/J/12

�

50 Select the most appropriate image from your WEB32 folder and use this to replace the words Contact us in Table C.

Create a hyperlink from this image to send an email message to [email protected] with a subject line Xtreme Holidays

51 Make sure that all of the images placed in steps 46 to 50 are 120 pixels wide. Maintain the aspect ratio of each image.

52 Save the page as XA.HTM in your WEB32 folder.





Attach the stylesheet J1232.CSS to this webpage. As you create the webpage make sure that the styles within the stylesheet are not changed.

54 Replace the text Candidate name, Centre number, candidate number with your name, Centre number and candidate number.

55 Replace the text Heading here with the text Enjoy your dives with: and format this as style h2.

56 Using the contents of the file J12FISH.TXT replace the text List text here with the text Novice divers… also catered for.

Format this as follows:

Beginners start with: as style p

pool sessions as style li

safety tuition as style li

developing confined water skills as style li

first ocean dive as style li

guided tasks as style li

qualification as an Open Water diver. as style li

You will: as style p

enjoy the experience as style li

view an undersea world as style li

see exotic fish. as style li

Qualified divers also catered for. as style p

57 Format the first list as an ordered list.

58 Format the second list as an unordered list.

59 Replace the text Image here with the image for scuba diving from your WEB32 folder. Do not resize this image.

7


�

60 Save the page as J12DIVE.HTM in your WEB32 folder.





8



© UCLES 2012 0417/32/M/J/12



• the external style sheet is attached to both webpages

• the table widths of all three tables in XA.HTM have been set

• the anchors start and combine have been placed

• Combination Holidays is set as hyperlink to the anchor combine

• the hyperlink from the scuba diving image opens J12DIVE.HTM in a new window called _ocean

• the hyperlink from the contact us image sends an email message to [email protected] with a subject line Xtreme Holidays

• hyperlink from the text ‘clicking on this link’ goes to the anchor start

• in the file J12Dive.htm you have set an ordered list

• in the file J12Dive.htm you have set an unordered list Write today’s date in the box below. Date



*7086168487*




2 hours 30 minutes










2

© UCLES 2012 0417/03/O/N/12

You work for Hothouse-Global-Properties who sell properties around the world.

�

1 Create a new word processed document.

Save this with the filename N2EVIDENCE



2 Create new folders called N32, NS32 and NP32 in your work area.

3 Open the webpage http://www.hothouse-design.co.uk/downloadN2012

4 Download and save the files N2PROPERTY.CSV and N2LOCATION.CSV into your NS32 folder.

5 Download and save the file N2PRES3.RTF into your NP32 folder.

6 Download and save the following files into your N32 folder:

N2BANNER.PNG

N2BOTTOM3.HTM

N2BUTTON1.PNG

N2BUTTON2.PNG

N2BUTTON3.PNG

N2BUTTON4.PNG

N2BUTTON5.PNG

N2BUTTON6.PNG

N2BUTTON7.PNG

N2BUTTON8.PNG

N2BUTTON9.PNG

N2FOOTER.PNG

N2HGP.PNG

N2IMG1.JPG

N2IMG2.JPG

N2IMG3.JPG

N2IMG4.JPG

N2IMG5.JPG

N2PAGE3.HTM

N2STAR.PNG

N2STYLE3.CSS

3


Your manager has asked you to manipulate a spreadsheet about some properties for sale in Hong Kong.

�

7 Using a suitable software package, load the file N2PROPERTY.CSV

8 Place your name, candidate number and Centre number on the left in the header. Place the full file path and filename in the centre of the footer.

9 In cell D2 use a lookup function to show the name of the area in which the property is located. Use the Area code column for the lookup value and the file N2LOCATION.CSV for the array.

This function must include both absolute and relative referencing and must not use a named range.

10 In cell I2 use a formula to calculate the price per square foot (sq ft) of the property.

11 Format all numeric values in column H into dollars with no decimal places.

12 In cell J2 use a formula to calculate the sales commission on this property. The sales commission is $10,000 plus:

• If the property has an Area (sq ft) of less than or equal to 500 square feet (sq ft), 5% of the Price

• If the property has an Area (sq ft) greater than 500 square feet (sq ft) and less than 4000 square feet (sq ft), 7.5% of the Price

• If the property has an Area (sq ft) greater than or equal to 4000 square feet (sq ft), 10% of the Price

13 In cell K2 use a formula for this property to add the Sales commission to the Price to give the Cost to customer

14 Replicate these 4 formulae for each of the properties.

15 In cell K75 use a function to calculate the total cost of all properties for sale.


17 Save and print the data model showing the formulae used. Make sure that the contents of all cells are fully visible and that the printout fits on two pages wide.

18 Format all numeric values in columns I, J and K into dollars with no decimal places.

19 Format all the cells in the top row to make them centre aligned, bold and italic.

20 Save the data model and print it showing the values. Make sure that the contents of all cells are fully visible and that the printout fits on a single page wide.

21 Hide columns B, C, H, I and J.

22 Interrogate the data to find all the properties where the Total Price is less than $10,000,000

23 Save the data model with a new filename and print this data.

24 Open the data model that you saved in step 20.

25 Interrogate the data, to find all the properties in any part of Kowloon.

4

© UCLES 2012 0417/03/O/N/12

�

26 Show only the data in columns A, B, D, E, H and I.

27 Sort the property details into descending order of Price

28 Save the data model with a new filename and print this data, showing row and column headings.

You are going to create a new website about some of their properties for sale in Europe. This website must open in any browser. The homepage will have two separate tables and look like this:

TOP

BOTT

OM

A

DEFG J

I

C

B

KH

L

29 Using a suitable software package, create a new webpage called N2HGP3.HTM in your N32 folder.

Attach the stylesheet N2STYLE3.CSS to this webpage.

30 Create the top table with 2 rows and 2 columns as shown.

31 Align this table with the centre of the window.

32 Set the table width to 750 pixels.

33 Set the cell padding and cell spacing of the table to 3 pixels.

34 Place the image N2HGP.PNG in cell A.

35 Resize this image so that it becomes 250 pixels high and 240 pixels wide.

36 Place the image N2BANNER.PNG in cell B.

37 In cell C insert the text:

Across 5 continents

Apply style h1 to this text.

5


�

38 In cell C, below the text entered in step 37, insert the text:

Last edited by and your name, Centre number and candidate number.

Apply style p to this text.

39 Set the background colour of this table to red with no other colour components.

40 Create the bottom table using the contents of N2BOTTOM3.HTM

41 Align the bottom table with the centre of the window.

42 Set the table width of the bottom table to 750 pixels.

43 Set the cell padding and cell spacing of the table to 3 pixels.

44 Set the background colour of this table to blue with no other colour components.

45 Look at the button images that you downloaded in step 6.

In cells D, E, F, G and H replace the name of the country with the appropriate button.

You may need to research this information electronically.

46 In cell I replace the text Star properties with the image N2STAR.PNG

47 In cell J replace the text House image here with an appropriate image of a house from the images provided.

48 In cell K replace the words Text here with an unordered list containing:

• built 1945

• 5 bedrooms

• renovated

• conservatory

• garden

49 In cell L replace the text Footer with the image N2FOOTER.PNG

50 Create a hyperlink from the image placed in cell D to point to the file N2PAGE3.HTM which should open in a new window called _belgium

51 Save the webpage and print a copy of the HTML source.

Open this page in your web browser. Place screenshot evidence of this page in your evidence document.


52 Save your evidence document. Print a copy of this document.

6

© UCLES 2012 0417/03/O/N/12

You are going to create a short presentation for your manager.

�

53 Open a suitable presentation package. Import the file N2PRES3.RTF from your NP32 folder.


(This should provide two slides, each containing a title and a bullet point.)



• your name, Centre number and candidate number in a 12 point black serif font in the top right corner

• automated slide numbers in the top left corner.

55 Format slide 1 so that the text is displayed as a title and subtitle. Centre align these objects. Do not change the font styles.

56 Replace the text your name with your name.

57 Change the format of slide 2 so that the bullet point becomes a subtitle.

58 Use the following data to create a comparative vertical bar chart and place this on the left below the subtitle on slide 2:

Area

Kowloon Midlevels Shatin

2010 $12 500 000 $9 800 000 $45 000 000

2011 $13 200 000 $11 400 000 $41 000 000

This chart will compare the sales in 2010 and 2011. Use the area names as category axis labels and the sales figures for the value axis.

59 Insert a clip-art image of a house, flat or apartment on slide 2. Place this to the right of the chart. Make sure that the chart is fully visible and no elements on any slide overlap.

60 Save the presentation using a new filename. Print the presentation with one slide on each page.

7

© UCLES 2012 0417/03/O/N/12

After the examination time – on the html printouts of your webpage Highlight those portions of the code which show that: • your name, Centre number and candidate number are present • the external style sheet is attached to the webpage • the top and bottom tables have a width of 750 • both tables have a cell spacing and cell padding set to 3 • the background colour of the top table is red • the background colour of the bottom table is blue • N2HGP.PNG has been resized to 240 wide x 250 high • the bulleted list has been created as specified • the hyperlink from the top left image of the lower table opens N2PAGE3.HTM in a new window

called _belgium Write today’s date in the box below. Date



*9113212281*




2 hours 30 minutes









2

© UCLES 2013 0417/21/M/J/13

You work for a company called Hothouse Renewable Energy. You are going to perform some tasks for this company.

�

1 Open the file JX3EVIDENCE.RTF


Save this evidence document in your work area as JX3EVIDENCE followed by your candidate number. For example: JX3EVIDENCE9999


2 Add the following contact details to your email contacts/address book:

FULL NAME EMAIL ADDRESS

Abdul Amar [email protected] Hussain Syed [email protected] Oliver Johnson [email protected]

Place screenshot evidence of only these entries in your evidence document.

3 Create an email group/distribution list named Energy Team

Add the three contacts entered at step 2 to this group. Save the group. Place screenshot evidence of the group and the three contacts that belong to this group in your evidence document. You will send a message to this group later.

You are now going to edit a report about offshore wind power.

4 Using a suitable software package, load the file JX3WINDFARMS.RTF

5 Set the:

• page size to A4

Place screenshot evidence of your page size settings in your evidence document.

• orientation to landscape

• top and bottom margins to 2 centimetres

• left and right margins to 2.5 centimetres.

Place screenshot evidence of your margin and page orientation settings in your evidence document.



• your Centre number left aligned

• the automated file name right aligned.



• your name and candidate number right aligned.


Make sure that headers and footers are displayed on all pages.

3


�

8 At the start of the document enter the title Offshore Wind Energy

9 Make the title:

• centre aligned

• font size 26 point

• bold and underlined



11 Set the title and subtitle to a sans-serif font.

12 Make the subtitle:

• right aligned


• italic and bold

13 After the subtitle format the rest of the document as body text into three equally spaced columns, with 1.5 centimetre spacing between the columns.

14 Set all of the body text to:

• be fully justified


• a serif font


15 Make sure there is a single blank line after each paragraph of the body text.


A Global Power Source

17 Identify all the subheadings in the document and make them all:

• centre aligned

• bold

• underlined

• sans-serif

• 14 point

Make sure there is one line space below each subheading.

18 Insert a table with two columns and eleven rows after the text: The 9 European countries with offshore wind power capacity in 2010 were:

19 Merge the cells in the top row of the table.

4

© UCLES 2013 0417/21/M/J/13

�


Offshore wind power in Europe

Country Capacity (MW)

UK 1341

Denmark 854

Netherlands 249

Belgium 195

Sweden 164

Germany 92

Finland 26

Ireland 25

Norway 2.3

Make sure the table fits within the column, there is a single line space above and below the table and the text is formatted as body text.

21 Format only the text in the top row of the table to be:

• bold

• centre aligned

22 Apply light grey shading (20 – 40%) to only the top two rows of the table.

23 Find a clipart image of a wind turbine or windmill.

Re-size the image to a height of 3.5 cm and maintain the aspect ratio.

Place this image:


• below the subheading A Global Power Source





24 Apply square shaped bullets to the list of benefits from:

Higher wind speeds…

to

…No noise impact

25 Apply 1.5 line spacing to the bulleted list.


5



�

27 Using a suitable database package, import the file JX3OFFSHORE.CSV


NAME DATA TYPE FORMAT

ID Text

Country Text

Number Number Integer

Name Text

Distance Number 1 decimal place

Operational Boolean/Logical Yes/No

Capacity Number Integer

Depth Number Integer

Height Number 1 decimal place

Diameter Number Integer

Sea Text

28 Place a screenshot showing the field names and data types used into your evidence document.


ID

Co

un

try

Nu

mb

er

Na

me

Dis

tan

ce

Op

era

tio

na

l

Ca

pa

city

De

pth

He

igh

t

Dia

me

ter

Se

a

BE04 Belgium 36 Eldepasco 37.0 Yes 216 20 130.0 90 North Sea

IE01 Ireland 7 Arklow Bank

10.0 Yes 25 30 129.0 111 Irish Sea

NR01 Norway 1 Hywind 10.5 Yes 2 22 106.2 82 North Sea


31 Save the data.

6

© UCLES 2013 0417/21/M/J/13

�


• contains a new field called Turbine_Capacity which is calculated at run-time. This field will calculate the Capacity divided by the Number of turbines

• has the Turbine_Capacity field displayed to 1 decimal place

• shows only the records where the Sea is North Sea or Irish Sea and Operational is Yes

• shows only the fields Country, ID, Name, Number, Distance, Operational, Capacity, Height, Sea and Turbine_Capacity in this order with their labels in full

• sorts the data into ascending order of Country and then ascending order of Name



• calculates the total Number of turbines and places it at the bottom of the report

• has a label to the left of this number Total turbines in operation

• includes the heading Power from North and Irish Seas at the top of the page




• selects only those locations

• in the United Kingdom

• in the North Sea

• with a capacity of 90 or more megawatts (MW)

• which are operational

• shows only the fields Name, Sea, Capacity in this order

• sorts the Capacity in descending order (largest to smallest)


36 Import this data into your document as a table after the paragraph which ends: Offshore wind farms in the UK producing 90 MW or more of power are:

Make sure that all required fields and their labels are fully visible and that there is one blank line above and one below the extract.








Make sure all formatting is consistent throughout your document.


Print the document.

7


You are now going to create a short presentation.

�

39 Import the file JX3PRES.RTF placing the text as slides in your presentation software.


(This should provide six slides, each containing a title and some bullet points.)



• the image LOGO.JPG placed in the top right corner; the height of the image should be 2.5 cm and the aspect ratio should be maintained


• automatic slide numbers in the bottom left corner

• a horizontal black line, 3 points wide, across the slide below the image

• the text Renewable Energy in a black 72 point serif font above the line, left aligned; make sure the text does not wrap.

No master slide elements, text or images should overlap on any slides.



42 Enter the text Wind Power in Europe as the title.

Enter the text Progress since 1 January 2009 as a subtitle.

43 Delete the slide with the title EUROPEAN TARGETS.

44 Move the slide with the title PRODUCTION so that it becomes slide 3.

45 Create a vertical bar chart using the table in JX3CAPACITY to show the predicted growth in global wind power capacity between 2010 and 2015.


• the title Global Wind Power Capacity

• category series labels displayed in full

• axis titles as Region and Wind Power Capacity (MW)

47 Place the chart to the left of the bullet points on the slide with the title GROWTH PREDICTIONS.


Print the presentation with six slides to the page.

Print the slide with the title GROWTH PREDICTIONS as a full slide.

8



© UCLES 2013 0417/21/M/J/13

�


• to be sent to the group called Energy Team (from your address book)


• with the subject line Offshore wind farms


• your name



• the text: The annual report is attached for your information.


51 Take a screenshot of this email, showing clearly that the attachment is present, and place it in your evidence document.

Send the email.





*5473380703*




2 hours 30 minutes









2

© UCLES 2013 0417/22/M/J/13

You work for a company called Hothouse Design. You are going to perform some tasks for this company.

�


Make sure your name, Centre number and candidate number will appear on every page of this document.

Save this evidence document in your work area as J22EVIDENCE followed by your candidate number. For example, J22EVIDENCE9999. You will need this file later.

2 Add to your email address book these new contacts:

Name Job title Email address

Jane Jones Editor [email protected]

Alice Nie Manager [email protected]

Rajinder Ghee Print Manager [email protected]

Place screenshot evidence of only these entries in your evidence document.

3 Create an email group/distribution list named Editorial team

Add the three contacts entered at step 2 to this group. Save the group. Place screenshot evidence of the group and the three contacts that belong to this group in your evidence document. You will send a message to this group later.

You are now going to edit a document about choosing hardware for a computer.

�

4 Using a suitable software package, load the file J13DRIVES.RTF

5 Set the:

• page size to A4

Place screenshot evidence of your page size settings in your evidence document.

• page orientation to landscape

• top and bottom margins to 2 centimetres

• left margin to 2.5 centimetres

• right margin to 1 centimetre.

Place screenshot evidence of your margin and page orientation settings in your evidence document.


3


�

7 Set all the text to:

• a 12 point sans-serif font


• be left aligned.


9 Place your candidate name, candidate number, your Centre number, the automated file name and path in the header.

Place today’s date and an automated page number in the footer.


10 Insert a blank line at the start of the document and enter the title

Building a Crazy but Cool Computer

11 Make the title centre aligned with a 26 point serif font. Make only the words Crazy but Cool italic.

12 Add this subtitle below the title.

Choosing your storage by: and add your name.

13 Set the subtitle to be:

• an 18 point serif font

• underlined

• right aligned.

14 After the subtitle format the rest of the document into two equally spaced columns, with a 1 centimetre gap.

15 Find an image of a hard disc drive and place it in the left column of the first page at the start of the second paragraph just after the heading Get lots of storage

Align it with the top line of the text and the left margin.

16 Re-size the image to fill about half the column and maintain the aspect ratio.



17 Find all subheadings in the document and set them to font size 14 with centre alignment.


4

© UCLES 2013 0417/22/M/J/13

�

19 Create a new database, with the following record structure:

Code Numeric / Integer This will be unique for each record Model Text Connection Text Type Text RPM Text Interface Text Gb_s Numeric / 1 decimal place

Capacity Numeric / Integer Size Numeric / 1 decimal place Price Currency / 2 decimal places Stock_item Boolean / Logical Display as Yes/No or a check box

Currency will be displayed in Euros with two decimal places.

20 Assign the most appropriate field as the primary key.

21 Save a screenshot showing the field names and data types used. Place a copy of this screenshot in your evidence document.

22 Import the data from the file J13STORAGE.CSV into the database created at step 19.


Code Model Connection Type RPM Interface Gb_s Capacity Size Price Stock _item

973062 Samsung 830

Internal SSD N/A SATA 6 256 2.5 389.99 Yes

973063 Hitachi UltraStar

Internal HDD 10000 SATA 6 850 3.5 459.99 Yes

973064 Intel 320 Internal SSD N/A SATA 6 512 2.5 639.99 Yes


Save the data.


• contains a new field called Price_per_GB which is calculated at run-time. This field will calculate the Price divided by the Capacity

• has the Price_per_GB field set as currency with 2 decimal places

• shows only the records where the Connection is Internal, Interface is SATA and Stock_item is Yes




• sorts the data into ascending order of Type, then ascending order of Code

• calculates the average price per GB of these drives and

• shows this value at the bottom of the Price_per_GB column

• formats the average price to currency with 2 decimal places

• has the label Average price per GB for all drives

• includes the title Internal SATA storage devices at the top of the page



5


�

27 Using the data selected in step 25, refine your search to produce another report which:

• shows only those records from step 25 where

• Type is SSD

• Gb_s is 6

• fits on one page wide in portrait layout

• shows only the fields Model, Connection, Type, Interface, Gb_s, Capacity, Price, and Stock_item

• is sorted into descending order of Price

• includes the title Some of the fastest SSD drives at the top of the report

• has your name, Centre number and candidate number at the top of the report.


29 Further refine your search in step 27 to include only solid state drives with a capacity of 128 or less. Sort these drives into descending order of Capacity

30 Include this list showing only the fields Model, Type, Gb_s, Capacity and Price in the document just after the sentence that ends:

… solid state drives that you might consider for the system:

31 From all the data, find the cheapest price per GB of a SATA HDD and copy the details into the table in the document.

32 From all the data, find the cheapest price per GB of a SATA SSD and copy the details into the table in the document.

33 Merge the cells in the top row of the table and centre align the text.

34 Make only the text in the second row of the table underlined.

35 Set only the outside lines of the table to a width of about 3 points as a thick line.







Make sure all formatting is consistent throughout your document.


Print the document.

6

© UCLES 2013 0417/22/M/J/13

You are now going to work on a presentation.

�

38 Using the file J1322PRES.RTF, create a new presentation. This should contain five slides with bullet points.

39 Make sure your name and the slide numbers appear on every slide.

40 Delete any blank slides.

41 Change the layout of slide one to title and subtitle.

42 On the slide with the title Solid state drives – benefits add as the first bullet point, the text

Very fast operating system start up

43 Set the same transition between slides.

44 Set only the bullet points on all slides to appear one by one.

45 Provide screenshot evidence of transitions and animations and place this in your evidence document.

46 Print all slides as audience notes, three per page.



• copied to the Editorial team from your contacts list

• with the subject line Draft for storage article


• your name



• the text The document for your editorial comments is attached.

48 Attach to your email the document which you last saved at step 37.

49 Take a screenshot of this email, showing clearly that the attachment is present, and place it in your evidence document.

Send the email.





*4779043849*




2 hours 30 minutes









2

© UCLES 2013 0417/31/M/J/13

�




2 Create a new folder called J1331_web

3 Locate and download the following files from the website http://www.hothouse-design.co.uk/hotprop Store them in your J1331_web folder: J1331-1.JPG

J1331-2.JPG

J1331-3.JPG

J1331-4.JPG

J1331-5.JPG

J1331-6.JPG

J1331-7.JPG

J1331-8.JPG

J1331FARM.TXT

J1331PROP.HTM

J1331STYLE.CSS

3


A trainee has created a stylesheet to be used with a website. This contains errors. All colour codes are in hexadecimal. The stylesheet should define the following styles:

h1 Colour: Red 66, Green 0, Blue 0 Font: Arial, if not available any sans-serif font 20 points high Centre aligned

h2 Colour: Red 66, Green 0, Blue 0 Font: Arial, if not available any sans-serif font 15 points high Left aligned

h3 Colour: Red 66, Green 0, Blue CC Font: Arial, if not available any sans-serif font 12 points high Centre aligned

li Colour: Red 0, Green 0, Blue 0 Font: Times New Roman, if not available any serif font 12 points high Left aligned Italic Bullets Disc

p Colour: Red 0, Green 0, Blue 0 Font: Times New Roman, if not available any serif font 12 points high Left aligned

body background colour Red FF, Green FC, Blue 99

�

4 Open the stylesheet J1331STYLE.CSS in a suitable package. The stylesheet was not finished and contains a number of errors. Correct and complete this stylesheet.

5 Save this stylesheet in your J1331_web folder. Use the filename MYSTL followed by your candidate number. For example: if your candidate number is 9999 then you will call the file MYSTL9999.css

6 Take a screenshot showing the text of your stylesheet and place this in your evidence document. Make sure that the filename is clearly visible.

7 Using a suitable software package, open the file J1331PROP.HTM

8 Attach the stylesheet saved in step 5 to this webpage.


10 Set the table border to 2 and the cell padding to 10

11 Select the most appropriate image from those downloaded in step 3 and use it to replace the text Image of house

12 Select the most appropriate image from those downloaded in step 3 and use it to replace the text Image of garage

4

© UCLES 2013 0417/31/M/J/13

�

13 Select the most appropriate image from those downloaded in step 3 and use it to replace the text Image of small farm

14 Use the image placed in step 13 to create a hyperlink to a new webpage called FARM.HTM which will open in a new window called _farm

15 Select the most appropriate image from those downloaded in step 3 and use it to replace the text Image of vegetable shop

16 Resize the images placed in steps 11 to 15 so that they are 180 pixels wide and maintain their aspect ratio.

17 Create a hyperlink from the text Sales Team so that it sends an email message with the subject line Property enquiry to [email protected]

18 Save the webpage as PROPERTIES.HTM

Display the webpage in your browser. If necessary, resize your browser window so that it fills the entire screen. Take a screenshot of the entire screen and place this in your evidence document.


19 Using a suitable software package, create a new webpage called FARM.HTM


21 This webpage must open in any browser and contain a single table to look like this:

A

C D

B

22 In cell A enter the text:

Hot Properties

Bargain of the week!

Set it as style h1.

23 Open a copy of the image used in step 13. Crop to remove the bottom ⅓ of the image.

Place this image in cell B.

24 In cell C enter the text:

Webpage last edited by:

followed by your name, Centre number and candidate number.

Set this in style p.

25 Place the contents of the file J1331FARM.TXT into cell D and set it as style h3.

5


�

26 Set the table border to 2.

27 Save the page as FARM.HTM



You are going to prepare a spreadsheet for HotProp Real Estate. They will use the spreadsheet to calculate their earnings from each property when it is sold. Display all currency values in dollars with 2 decimal places.

28 Using a suitable software package, load the file J1331PROP.CSV

29 Insert a new row above row 1.

30 In cell A1 enter the text Bavaro Office

31 Merge cells A1 to H1 so they become a single cell.

Format the text in this cell so it is a white 18 point sans-serif font. Format this cell so that it is right aligned and has a black background colour.

32 On the left in the header add your name, Centre number and candidate number.

On the right in the header add the text Last revision on followed by an automated date and time.

33 Properties 1053 to 1056 are those advertised in the webpage PROPERTIES.HTM

For each property, enter the distance from the centre of Bavaro into the Distance column of the spreadsheet.

34 In cell C3 enter a formula to calculate the income the property company will make when the property is sold. This is 100 dollars plus two and a half percent of the price of the property.

35 In cell E3 enter a formula to display the viewing cost if a local taxi is used. If the distance to the property is:

• less than 5 kilometres, the cost will be 2 dollars

• 5 kilometres or more and less than 15 kilometres, the cost will be 5 dollars

• 15 kilometres or more, the cost will be 10 dollars.

36 In cell H3 enter a formula to calculate the profit from the sale. This will be calculated by taking from the income; both the viewing cost multiplied by the number of times viewed, and the advertising cost.

37 Apply appropriate formatting to all cells.

38 Replicate the formulae entered in steps 34 to 36 for all properties.

39 In cell H41 enter a formula to calculate the total profit if all the properties were sold.

Edit this formula so that it also rounds this value to the nearest whole dollar.

40 Display the contents of cell H41 so that it shows only integer values.

6

© UCLES 2013 0417/31/M/J/13

�

41 Save and print the spreadsheet showing formulae. Make sure:

• it is in landscape orientation

• the row and column headings are displayed

• the printout is only one page wide

• the contents of all cells are fully visible.

42 Print the spreadsheet showing the values. Make sure:

• the printout fits on a single portrait page


43 Update the spreadsheet with the following data:

• Property number 1053 has been visited 3 times

• Property number 1055 has been visited 5 times




Your manager would like to see the effects of changing the spreadsheet model.

45 The income from the sale of the properties was calculated in step 34. Change the formulae to 150 dollars plus two percent of the price of the property.





7

© UCLES 2013 0417/31/M/J/13

After the examination time - on the html printouts highlight the markup which shows:

• your name, Centre number and candidate number

• the external stylesheet attached to the webpage

• the table border and cell padding

• the four images you have resized

• the hyperlink from the farm image opens the webpage FARM.HTM in a new window called _farm

• the hyperlink from the text Sales Team sends an email message with the subject line Property enquiry to [email protected]




*9967816660*




2 hours 30 minutes









2

© UCLES 2013 0417/32/M/J/13

�




You are going to prepare a spreadsheet for Supa-Scuba. You will use the spreadsheet to create a chart and calculate the costs of diving trips. Display all currency values in dollars with 2 decimal places.

2 Using a suitable software package, load the file J1332SHEET.CSV

Save this file with your Centre number and candidate number, e.g. ZZ999_0001

3 Insert a new row above row 1.

4 In cell A1 enter the title Supa-Scuba Trips 2012-13

5 Merge cells:

• B2 to E2

• F2 to I2

• J2 to M2

• N2 to Q2

Format these cells so that:

• text is centre aligned with a black, 18 point, sans-serif font

• each has a grey background colour and a thin black border.

6 Format cells A2 and R2 so that they appear the same as those formatted in step 5.

7 In cell E4 use a function to calculate the number of trips in April, May and June.

8 In cell E5 use a function to calculate the total income from April, May and June.

9 In cell E6 use a function to calculate the total expenditure from April, May and June.

10 Replicate the formulae entered in steps 7 to 9 to calculate and display the data for quarters 2, 3 and 4.

11 Calculate the profit for each month and each quarter.

[ Profit = Income – Expenditure ]

12 Calculate the total number of trips, income, expenditure and profit for the year.

13 On the left in the footer add your name, Centre number and candidate number.

On the right in the footer add the automated file name and path.

14 In cell B9 use a function to display the greatest monthly profit.

15 In cell B10 use a function to display the lowest monthly profit.

3


�

16 In cell B11 use a function to display the average monthly profit.

17 Apply appropriate formatting to all cells except row 2.

18 Edit the formula in cell B11 so that it also rounds this value to the nearest whole dollar.

Display the contents of this cell so that it shows only integer values.

19 Save and print the spreadsheet showing formulae. Make sure:

• it is in landscape orientation

• the row and column headings are displayed



• the printout fits on a single page


21 Update the spreadsheet with the following data for December:

• The income was $45 000

• The expenditure was $42 000


• the printout fits on a single page


23 Produce a vertical bar chart to compare the monthly income for each of the twelve months.

Fully label your chart but do not display a legend.

Place a copy of this chart in your evidence document.

24 Produce a pie chart to compare the number of trips in each quarter. This must be created in black, white and greyscale.

Make sure that all segments have different shades or fill patterns so that they can be easily identified when printed in black and white. Include a legend to identify each quarter. Fully label your chart. Make sure these segments show the number of trips for the quarter.

25 Extract the largest segment from the chart so that it stands out from the others.

Place a copy of this chart in your evidence document.

4

© UCLES 2013 0417/32/M/J/13

�

26 Create a new folder called J1332_html

27 Locate and download the following files from the website http://www.xahc.co.uk/supa-scuba Store them in your J1332_html folder: J1332IMG1.JPG J1332IMG2.JPG J1332IMG3.JPG J1332IMG4.JPG J1332IMG5.JPG J1332IMG6.JPG J13LOGO.JPG J13SUNSET.JPG J13SUPA.HTM J13STYLE32.CSS

A student has tried to create a stylesheet to be used with a webpage. All colour codes are in hexadecimal. The stylesheet should define the following styles:

h1 Colour: Red FF, Green FF, Blue 0 Font: Trebuchet, if not available then Arial or any sans-serif font 24 points high Centre aligned

h2 Colour: Red 0, Green 0, Blue CC Font: Arial 16 points high Right aligned

h3 Colour: Red 0, Green 0, Blue CC Font: Arial 12 points high Centre aligned

li Colour: Red 0, Green 0, Blue 0 Font: Arial 12 points high Left aligned Bullets: Disc

p Colour: Red 0, Green 0, Blue 0 Font: Arial 12 points high Left aligned

body Background colour: Red 0, Green CC, Blue FF

28 Open the stylesheet J13STYLE32.CSS in a suitable package. The stylesheet was not finished and contains a number of errors. Correct and complete this stylesheet using the information above.

29 Save this stylesheet in your J1332_html folder. Use the filename STYLE followed by your candidate number. For example: if your candidate number is 9999 then you will call the file STYLE9999.css

5


�

30 Take a screenshot showing the text of your stylesheet and place this in your evidence document. Make sure that the filename is clearly visible.

31 Using a suitable software package, open the file J13SUPA.HTM




35 Set the table to fill the width of the window.

36 Replace the text Place logo here with the image J13LOGO.JPG

37 Select the most appropriate image from those downloaded in step 27 and use it to replace the text Place starfish here

38 Select the most appropriate image from those downloaded in step 27 and use it to replace the text Place shark here

39 Select the most appropriate image from those downloaded in step 27 and use it to replace the text Place turtle here

40 Resize the images placed in steps 37 to 39 so they are 200 pixels wide and maintain their aspect ratio.



Take a copy of the HTML source and place this in your evidence document.

42 Print your evidence document.

6

© UCLES 2013 0417/32/M/J/13

After the examination time - on the html printouts highlight the markup which shows: • your name, Centre number and candidate number • the external stylesheet attached to the webpage • the table border and width • the three images you have resized.


information technology 0418/03 2 hours 45 … international examinations international general...

Documents